GMDSS_TCE-D

GMDSS Equipment

System settings list

FS-1562

FS-75/2550

FS-5000/8000

DSC-5

DSC-6

DSC-8V

DSC-60

AA-50

DP-5

DP-6

FM-7000

FM-7500

FM-8000

FM-8500

FM-8700

DMC-5

FELCOM 10

FELCOM 11

FELCOM 12

FELCOM 80

FELCOM81

FELCOM82

REMOTE STATION

NX-500

IB-581

IB-582

TCE-59060-D

(J58-19110-0)

(0208, NAYO)

Instructions for Canceling Distress Alert Procedure Sample message

VHF DSC 1. Switch off transmitter (transmitter and

DSC terminal) immediately. 2. Switch equipment on and set to Ch 16. 3. Make broadcast to "All Stations" giving

your vessel's name, callsign and DSC number, and cancel the false distress alert.

All Stations, All Stations, All Stations This is NAME, CALLSIGN, DSC NUMBER, POSITION. Cancel my distress alert of DATE, TIME, UTC. =Master, NAME, CALLSIGN. DSC NUMBER, DATE, TIME UTC.

MF DSC 1. Switch off equipment (transmitter and

DSC terminal) immediately. 2. Switch equipment on and tune for

Radiotelephony transmission on 2182 kHz.

3. Make broadcast to "All Stations" giving the vessel's name, callsign and DSC number, and cancel the false distress alert.

All Stations, All Stations, All Stations This is NAME, CALLSIGN, DSC NUMBER, POSITION. Cancel my distress alert of DATE, TIME, UTC =Master, NAME, CALLSIGN. DSC NUMBER, DATE, TIME UTC.

HF DSC Same as for MF but the alert must be cancelled on all the frequency bands on which it was transmitted. Hence, the transmitter should be tuned consecutively to the radiotelephony distress frequencies in the 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 MHz bands, as necessary.

Inmarsat C Notify the appropriate RCC to cancel the alert by sending a distress priority message via the same CES through which the false distress alert was sent.

NAME, CALLSIGN, IDENTITY NUMBER, POSITION, Cancel my Iinmarsat-C distress alert of DATE, TIME, UTC =Master +

EPIRB If for any reason, an EPIRB is activated accidentally, the ship should contact the nearest coast station or an appropriate coast earth station or RCC and cancel the distress alert. * Notwithstanding the above, a ship may use any means available to inform the appropriate authorities that a false distress alert has been transmitted and should be cancelled. * No action will normally be taken against any ship or mariner for reporting and canceling a false distress alert. However, in view of the serious consequences of false alert, and the strict ban on their transmission, Governments may prosecute in cases of repeated violations.

i

GMDSS equipment key points

Equipment Menu (Item) Pass word/key point Note [SELECT] “PRG” System settings [SETUP] [4]:XMITR Re-enter the MMSI

Ignore ID ON [SETUP] “I”, enter to “652111”

Selection of VHF or MF/HF

[SETUP] [5]:SCAN Set the RX SCAN frequency as “99999.9”.

To canceling SCAN frequency

DSC-5

[SETUP] [1]:Position [SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”.

To canceling manual position data.

[SELECT] [9] :System System settings [SELECT] [!]:dimmer

[SELECT] [9] “P”, enter to “652111”.

For test

[SELECT] [0]:SCAN Set the RX SCAN frequency as “99999.9”.

To canceling SCAN frequency

[SELECT] [1]:Position [SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”.


DSC-6

[SELECT] [9] “MMSI” (Re-enter the MMSI)

EEROM clear (NMI SW ON)

Ver-1.05 and after

[SELECT] [9]:System System settings [SELECT] [!]:dimmer For test [SELECT] [8]:Receiver

[SELECT] [9] “P”, enter to “652111”.

Selection of VHF or CH70

DSC-8V



[SETUP] “System” [SETUP] “Protection”, enter to “652111”.

System settings

Re-enter the MMSI EEROM clear (NMI SW ON), enter to “652111”

DSC-60

Confirmation of present Version number

[3]:TEST, press [1] key five times while pressing [#FILE] key.


[SELECT] [9] “P”, enter to “652111”. For test




FM-8500

[SELECT] [9] “private”

EEROM clear (NMI SW ON) DSC Ver-03 and later.


[SELECT] [9] “P”, enter to “652111”. For test




FM-8700

[SELECT] [9] “private”

EEROM clear (NMI SW ON)

ii

Equipment Menu (Item) Pass word/key point Note System settings; (CH preset, Mode selection, etc)

Jumper connection and press S17 on PANEL board.

ATIS setting JP-1: SUB-CPU board. CH70 setting JP-2: SUB-CPU board.

FM-7000

Setting to connect DSC JP-2: PANEL board JP-2: SUB-CPU board.

FM-7500 Refer to DSC-5 and FM-7000

FM-8000 System settings menu.

Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [CH16] key, enter to “652111”.

System settings menu.

Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [RCL] key, select the system CH 9999, then press the [RCL] “1562” and [ENT] key.

Channel presetting CH 1 to 200

To erase CH; [RCL] [0] [ENT]

Power adjustment [ENT]+[8]:HI power [ENT]+[9]:LOW power [ENT]+[7]:TUNE power

System CH 9998 “0”.

Self test (Transceiver unit) Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [TX] key.

Set the RF gain VR maximum.

FS-1562

Self test (LCD/key/Ver) Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ENT] key.

System settings menu.

Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [RCL] key, select the system CH 9999, then press the [CH] “75” and [ENT] key.

Channel presetting Each band; 0,1,2,4,6 ---25

To erase CH; [Freq.] [0] [ENT]

Power adjustment [ENT]+[8]:HI power [ENT]+[9]:LOW power [ENT]+[7]:TUNE power

System CH 9998 “0”.

Self test (Transceiver unit) Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [CURSOL] key.

Set the RF gain VR maximum.

FS-75/2550

Self test (LCD/key/Ver) Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ENT] key.

iii

Equipment Menu (Item) Pass word/key point Note

AT-1560 Self test

Turn on No.2 of the dip SW S2 in the ATU, then press the TUNE SW in the ATU.

To conform System settings [RCL] 9999 [ENT].

System settings menu. [STO] “system setting item No.” [ENT] “ setting No.” [ENT].

To conform user CH setting [RCL] 9998 [ENT].

Channel presetting

To preset; [STO] “CH No.” [ENT] [ENT]. To eras; [STO] “CH No.” [ENT] [0] [ENT].

Power adjustment

FULL power; [STO] [FULL] adjust to power by [FULL] or [UP] key.

LOW power [STO] [LOW] adjust to power by [FULL] or [UP] key.

FS-

5000/8000

BFO setting [STO] [BFO] To keep ”1700Hz”.

[F5] 6: AAB Re-enter AAB; Type “ANSWER CODE” (Type Cap. letter)

[F5] 7, 8, 9, 0: IDs Re-enter IDs; Type “ID CODE” (Type Cap. letter)

[F6]:Terminal

DP-5

[F8]:System

Changing system settings Type “DP5” (Type Cap. letter)

[F5] 5: AAB Re-enter AAB; Type “ANSWER CODE” (Type Cap. letter)

[F5] 6, 7, 8, 9: IDs Re-enter IDs; Type “ID CODE” (Type Cap. letter)

[F6]: System

Changing system settings Type “DP6” (Type Cap. letter)

Quit to application softwear. [Fn ]+ [F2] + [Alt] Ver 16 or later Terminal program update. B:\>install

Main program up date.

B:\> Type “nbdpinst”, press [F1], type “nbdp.exe”.

DP-6

Printer and Language settings. [Fn ]+ [F1], type “DP6”. (Type Cap. letter)

iv

Equipment Menu (Item) Pass word/key point Note FELCOM 10 None

FELCOM 11 Terminal program update. B:\>

Type “ibinst”. IB-581

Quit to application softwear. [Fn ]+ [Alt] + [F2] Terminal program update. B:\>

Type “ibinst”.

CPU-2 program updata. B:\> Type “upf12”, Turn on the power.

FELCOM 12

Confirm to terminal program version.

[Fn ] + [Alt] + [F1]

[F4] [3] [7]:AAB Re-enter AAB; [Alt]+[Ctrl], type “ANSWER”

[F4] [6] [6]: commissioning menu Job No.: FURUNOSERVICE Pass word: FELCOM80

IMN and OID/DID

[F4] [6][7]: manual control menu

“S2-#8 ON” on the CPU 2 board. Job No.: FURUNOMANUAL Pass word: 2582

Maintenance code “Status monitor & log print” *91#

Maintenance code “Status monitor

*96#

Maintenance code “Self test”

*90#

Maintenance code “ADJ to Rx level (Fax by voice CH)”

*70xx# (xx:50 to 82 default 70)

Maintenance code “ADJ to Tx level (Fax by voice CH)”


FELCOM 80

Maintenance code Return to default settings; (All setup item from No.1 TEL)

*60#

No.1 telephone

v

Equipment Menu (Item) Pass word/key point Note

[F4] [3] [8]:AAB Re-enter AAB; [Alt]+[Ctrl], type “ANSWER”

[F4] [6] [6]: commissioning menu Job No.: FURUNOSERVICE Pass word: FELCOM81

OID/DID

[F4] [6][7]: manual control menu

“S1-#8 ON” on the CPU 2 board. Job No.: FURUNOMANUAL Pass word: 3504

Maintenance code “Status monitor & log print”

*91#

Maintenance code “Status monitor

*96#

Maintenance code “Self test”

*90#

Maintenance code “ADJ to Rx level (Fax by voice CH)”


No.1 telephone

Maintenance code “Echo cancel”

*99ab# Each telephone

Maintenance code “ADJ to Tx level (Fax by voice CH)”


Maintenance code Return to default settings; (All setup item from No.1 TEL)

*60# No.1 telephone

FELCOM 81

Terminal program update. B:\> Type “ibinst”.

PFX-50 All memory clear [1][3][*], power on FC622SL1WG: TEL

Setting “Pb” [STO] [#][*][STO]

FC755D1: TEL

Setting “Pb” DIP SW-#1 “ON”

Content

1

A. MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone

Section A1. FS-1562-15/25 1. Connection...................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings............................................................................................... 2

2.1 Procedure ........................................................................................ 2

2.2 System channel list (Ver-09) ............................................................ 3


2.4 System settings descriptions ........................................................... 6

2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation ...................... 7

3. Channel Programming .................................................................................... 8

4. Power Data Setting ....................................................................................... 10

5. Self test ......................................................................................................... 12

5.1 Transceiver unit .............................................................................. 12

5.2 Antenna coupler unit...................................................................... 13

Section A2. FS-75/2550 1. Connection...................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings............................................................................................... 2

2.1 Procedure ........................................................................................ 2


2.3 System settings descriptions ........................................................... 5

2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation ...................... 6

3. Channel Programming .................................................................................... 7

4. Power Data Setting ......................................................................................... 9

5. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 11


5.2 Antenna coupler unit ...................................................................... 12

Content

Content

2

Section A3. FS-5000/8000 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2

2.1System Channel List......................................................................... 2

2.2 Confirmation of settings.................................................................... 6

2.3 System channel description ............................................................. 7

2.4 Default setting for each country...................................................... 12

3. Jumper settings ............................................................................................ 13

3.1For NAV data format selecting, CIF or NMEA................................. 13

3.2When using C.Loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500 .............. 13

4. User (Preset) Channel Programming............................................................ 15

5. Power Adjustment......................................................................................... 16

6. Self test......................................................................................................... 21


6.2 Antenna Coupler unit ..................................................................... 22

B. DSC Terminal

Section B1. DSC-5 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. Changing System Settings and MMSI number ............................................... 3

2.1 Changing system settings ................................................................ 3

2.2 Settings List...................................................................................... 5

3. Jumper wire settings....................................................................................... 8

4. Self test........................................................................................................... 9

5. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ................................................... 10

6. DSC Frequency table.................................................................................... 12

7. Menu tree ..................................................................................................... 13

8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone .................. 17

9. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone ...................... 18

Content

3

Section B2. DSC-6/6A 1. Connector on Rear Panel ............................................................................... 1

2. Typical Configurations (Type-1)....................................................................... 1

3. System settings .............................................................................................. 3

3.1 Initial settings.................................................................................... 3

3.2 Changing System settings................................................................ 4

4. System settings list ......................................................................................... 5

5. Jumper setting ................................................................................................ 7

6. Changing ID (MMSI) number.......................................................................... 8

7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ..................................................... 9

8. Self test......................................................................................................... 11

9. DSC Frequency table.................................................................................... 12

10. Menu list ..................................................................................................... 13

11. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone ................ 15

Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. Changing system settings............................................................................... 2


4. Jumper wire setting......................................................................................... 4

5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM ...................................................... 5

6. Self test........................................................................................................... 7

7. Menu List: [SELECT] ...................................................................................... 8

8. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone ...................... 10

Content

4

Section B4. DSC-60 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System setup list ............................................................................................ 2

2.1 Setup menu: [#/SETUP] ................................................................... 2

2.2 System menu description ................................................................. 4

3. Setting DIP Switches ...................................................................................... 6

3.1 Outline of the settings on CONTROL/MODEM board ...................... 6

3.2 Setting for the connection with FS-75/1562/5000 and DP-6............. 7

3.3 Setting for the connection with navigational aids.............................. 8

3.4 Setting for the connection with DMC, IC-302 and PC....................... 9

4. Setting the receiver board............................................................................. 10

5. How to enter MMSI ....................................................................................... 11

6. Self test......................................................................................................... 12

7. Setup menu list ............................................................................................. 13

8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone .................. 18

9. How to update system program.................................................................... 19

9.1 Over view....................................................................................... 19

9.2 Updating MAIN program with IB-581 ............................................. 20

9.3 Updating MODEM program with IB-581......................................... 21

C. MF/HF Watch Receiver

Section C1. AA-50 1. Over view........................................................................................................ 1

2. Connection ..................................................................................................... 2

3. Jumper setting ................................................................................................ 2

4. Self test........................................................................................................... 3

Content

5

D. NBDP

Section D1. DP-5 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. Setting list ....................................................................................................... 2

3. Initial settings.................................................................................................. 5

3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry ................................................ 5

3.2 Terminal settings (F6)....................................................................... 6

3.3 System settings (F8) ....................................................................... 9

3.4 Manual Reception (F3-6) .............................................................. 12

3.5 NAV data format selection (CIF/NMEA) ........................................ 12

4. Changing AAB, ID code, Terminal and System settings ............................... 13

4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code....................................... 13

4.2 Changing F6 and F8 settings ......................................................... 14

5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM .................................................... 15 5.1 S-RAM clear .................................................................................. 15

5.2 EEROM clear ................................................................................. 16

Section D2. DP-6 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. Settings list ..................................................................................................... 2

3. Initial settings.................................................................................................. 3

3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry ................................................ 3

3.2 System settings (F6) ....................................................................... 4

3.3 Manual Reception (F3-6) ................................................................ 6

3.4 Printer and Language setting ........................................................... 6

4. Changing AAB, ID code and System settings................................................. 7

4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code......................................... 7

4.2 Changing F6: System settings.......................................................... 8

5. Self Test .......................................................................................................... 9

6. How to Update Programs.............................................................................. 10

6.1Terminal Program ........................................................................... 10

6.2Main: Main Unit Program ................................................................ 12

Content

6

E. VHF Radiotelephone

Section E1. FM-7000 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System Settings.............................................................................................. 2

2.1 System setting Jumper Connections ................................................ 2

2.2 Disabling/enabling ATIS

(Jumper Connection on SUB-CPU Board) ....................................... 9

2.3 Disabling/enabling USA CH2/3/4.................................................... 10

2.4 Setting to connect DSC terminal (FM-7000) ................................. 11

3. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 12

3.1Tx Power Adjustment ...................................................................... 12

3.2 Frequency Adjustment ................................................................... 12

4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 13

5. Private Channel List...................................................................................... 17


2. Settings........................................................................................................... 1


2. System Settings.............................................................................................. 1

2.1 Changing System setting ................................................................. 1

2.2 Channel Preset (CH0 to CH255 available) ....................................... 5

3. Adjustment...................................................................................................... 8

3.1Tx Power Adjustment ........................................................................ 8

3.2 Frequency Adjustment ..................................................................... 8

4. Self test........................................................................................................... 9

5. Private Channel List...................................................................................... 13

Content

7


2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2

2.1 Initial Settings................................................................................... 2

2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) .............................. 5


4. Jumper Setting................................................................................................ 8

5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode.......................................................... 9

6. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 11

6.1 TX Power Adjustment ..................................................................... 11

6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment .............................................................. 12


8. Self test......................................................................................................... 15

9. Private Channel list....................................................................................... 18

10. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone .................... 21


2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2

2.1 Initial Settings................................................................................... 2

2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) .............................. 5


4. Jumper settings .............................................................................................. 8

5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode.......................................................... 9

6. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 11

6.1 TX Power Adjustment ..................................................................... 11

6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment .............................................................. 13


8. Self test......................................................................................................... 16

9. Private Channel list....................................................................................... 19

10. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone .................... 22

Content

8

F. Distress Message Controller

Section F1. DMC-5 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1

3. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ..................................................... 3

4. Self test........................................................................................................... 5

G. INMARSAT C

Section G1. FELCOM 10 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1

2.1 System setup: [F5]............................................................................ 1

2.2 Terminal setup: [F6] .......................................................................... 2

2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]........................................................ 2

3. Jumper wire setting......................................................................................... 3

3.1 EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting ....................................... 3

3.2 For Data Format (NMEA/CIF) ......................................................... 4

4. System status monitor .................................................................................... 5

5. S-RAM Clear .................................................................................................. 7

6. Menu Tree....................................................................................................... 8

7. FURUNO Information (FQ5-93-025:New Version CPU Board) ..................... 9

Content

9

Section G2. FELCOM 11 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1

2.1 System setup: [F5]............................................................................ 1

2.2 Terminal: [F6].................................................................................... 2

2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]........................................................ 2

3. Dip switch setting............................................................................................ 3


5. FURUNO Information...................................................................................... 6

FQ5-96-003: On Shortening the Antenna Cable .................................... 6

FQ5-95-012: Shortening the Antenna Cable/Modification of

Power Amplifier ...................................................................................... 7

6. MES ID ........................................................................................................... 8

7. S-RAM Clear (IC-511) .................................................................................... 8

8. Menu Tree....................................................................................................... 9

9. How to up date the Terminal (IB-581) program ............................................. 10 Section G3. FELCOM 12 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1

2.1 System: [F8] ..................................................................................... 1

2.2 Updating a Distress Alert: [F8].......................................................... 2

3. Dip switch setting............................................................................................ 3


5. MES ID ........................................................................................................... 6

6. Menu Tree....................................................................................................... 7

7. How to update the Terminal and CPU-2 program ........................................... 8

7.1Terminal ............................................................................................ 8

7.2 CPU-2 .............................................................................................. 9

Content

10

H. INMARSAT B

Section H1. FELCOM 80 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1


3. Setting procedure ........................................................................................... 5

3.1 DIP switch setting (Antenna unit: IB-180) ......................................... 5

3.2 Tx IF output level setting (Communication unit: IB-280) ................... 6

3.3 Gyro Converter setting (Communication unit: IB-280) .................... 7

3.4 Setting of Telephone....................................................................... 16

3.5 Printer: PP-510 Setting (Ver 1650098100) ................................... 16

3.6 FAX settings: PFX-50 ..................................................................... 17

3.7 Terminal settings ............................................................................ 22

4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 25

5. How to update Terminal Program.................................................................. 29



3. Setting procedure ........................................................................................... 4

3.1 Adjustment of limit switch (Antenna unit: IB-181) ............................. 4

3.2 Tx RF output Level setting (Communication unit: IB-281)................. 4

3.3 Setting of Telephone......................................................................... 5

3.4 FAX settings: PFX-50 ....................................................................... 6

3.5 Terminal settings ............................................................................ 11

4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 16

4.1 IB-581............................................................................................. 16

4.2 Description of Status Monitor Display............................................. 17

5. How to update the Terminal program ............................................................ 20 Reference) How to use HSD Checker .............................................................. 21

Content

11


2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2

2.1 Heading alignment ........................................................................... 2

2.2 Telephone setting ............................................................................. 3

2.3 Fax setting (PFX-50) ........................................................................ 4

2.4 Gyro setting ..................................................................................... 6

2.5 Setup NAV data input circuit .......................................................... 10

2.6 Entering answer back code (only for class-1)................................. 11

2.7 OID/DID setting.............................................................................. 12

2.8 HSD set up .................................................................................... 19

2.9 About password ............................................................................. 20

2.10 Returning settings to factory defaults........................................... 22

3. Self-test ........................................................................................................ 23

3.1 Using handset ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Using terminal unit ......................................................................... 24

3.3 Reading program number............................................................... 25

3.4 Distress alert test (FUNC683) ........................................................ 26

3.5 Status monitor ................................................................................ 28

3.6 Using two-digit code service (Loopback test) ................................. 36

3.7 9.6k Data test ................................................................................. 37

3.8 HSD test......................................................................................... 38

3.9 LED status...................................................................................... 40

3.10 How to check angular rate sensor................................................ 45

3.11 How to check rotary joint ............................................................. 45

3.12 Error Messages at the Terminal Unit............................................ 46

4. Program Update ........................................................................................... 51

4.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 52

4.2 Upgrading SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE,

and TERM programs ...................................................................... 53

4.3 Upgrading handset program .......................................................... 55

4.4 Upgrading terminal program .......................................................... 57

5. Menu tree ..................................................................................................... 58

5.1 Menu on handset ........................................................................... 58

5.2 Menu on terminal unit (Class1) ...................................................... 61

Content

12

I. REMOTE STATION

1. Over view........................................................................................................ 1

1.1 Remote port specifications............................................................... 3

2. RB-700

2.1 Priority settings................................................................................. 8

2.2 Jumper settings ................................................................................ 9

2.3 Confirmation of jumper settings...................................................... 10

2.4 Speaker and handset volume......................................................... 10

3. RB-500

3.1 Jumper settings .............................................................................. 11

3.2 Confirmation of jumper settings...................................................... 12

3.3 Speaker and handset volume......................................................... 12

3.4 Connection ..................................................................................... 13

4. DB-500

4.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 15

4.2 FS-5000/8000................................................................................. 16

4.3 RB-500/700 Connection ................................................................. 18

4.4 FS-1562 and DSC/DP Connection................................................. 20

4.5 Interconnection diagrams ............................................................... 21

5. Jumper settings on MAIN Board................................................................... 24

J. NAVTEX RECEIVER

Section J1. NX-500 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1

2. Slide switch settings ....................................................................................... 2

3. System settings .............................................................................................. 3

4. FURUNO Information (FQ5-93-006)............................................................... 4

5. Self test........................................................................................................... 6

6. Station List...................................................................................................... 8

Content

13

K. TERMINAL UNIT

Section K1. IB-581 1. How to Quit Programs .................................................................................... 1

2. Changing the Terminal Software..................................................................... 2

2.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 2

2.2 A method to change the terminal program by formatting A-drive ........ 2

3. Installing PC-DOS .......................................................................................... 4

3.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 4

3.2 Outline of the Procedure ..................................................................... 4

3.3 Until PC-DOS Starts ........................................................................... 5

3.4 Backup the System Files (PC-DOS: Ver.6.3)....................................... 7

3.5 Changing BIOS (Basic Input Output System) settings ........................ 8

3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector ....................................... 10

3.7 Installing System Files ...................................................................... 11

4. How to erase password ................................................................................ 13

5. AR-B1378-F2 (New type CPU card) ............................................................. 14

5.1 How to install PC-DOS...................................................................... 15

5.2 Changing BIOS settings.................................................................... 16

Section K2. IB-582 1. DOS installation.............................................................................................. 1

1.1 How to copy DOS program ................................................................. 1

1.2 Dos installation.................................................................................... 2

2. Erasing password ........................................................................................... 4

3. BIOS default ................................................................................................... 5

4. Layout and hardware settings......................................................................... 8

Content

14

Appendix

AP1. Cable specifications 1.1 Cable Specifications ..................................................................................... 1

1.2 How to calculate voltage drop in power cable............................................... 6

1.3 Coaxial Cable Specifications ........................................................................ 9

1.4 How to attach the antenna cable connector ............................................... 11

1.5 Installation of Pre-amp unit and coaxial cable ............................................ 13

AP2. Power consumption 2.1 Power consumption list................................................................................. 1

2.2 Reserve Source of Energy (By class NK)..................................................... 3

2.3 Sample of Battery calculation table .............................................................. 4

2.4 Specifications of Rectifier and Battery charger............................................. 5

AP3. NMEA 3.1 List of NMEA sentences ............................................................................... 1

3.2 Sentences formatters ................................................................................... 3

AP4. Program ROM 4.1 Communication Equipment ROM List........................................................... 1

4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed..................... 9

4.3 FURUNO Information ................................................................................. 11

Schematic diagram

05P0407D..................................................................................................... a

05P0407E ..................................................................................................... b

05P0407F ......................................................................................................c

05P0407G..................................................................................................... d

05P0407........................................................................................................ e

1. Connection

Section A1. FS-1562-15/25

A1-1

AT-1560-15

AT-1560-25

FS-1562

A1-2

2. System settings

2.1 Procedure

1. While pressing and holding down the [RCL] key, turn the power on. You get the

following display.

2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder.

3. Press the [RCL] [1] [5] [6] [2] and [ENT] keys in this order.

(1562 is the password.)

4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.

5. Press the [RCL] key, enter a setting number, and press the [ENT] key.

6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5.

7 .To restore normal operation, turn the power off, and on again.

99513

MEMO

System Channel

Setting No.

FS-1562

A1-3

2.2 System channel list (Ver-09)

Ver-09 Setting Default

System Channel

Function 0 1 2 3 4 Std Italy

Hol-

land Other

*9900 Country of Delivery Std Italy Holland Other 0 1 2 3

*9901 User Channel Clear Press [RCL] [1] [ENT] key to clear

*9902 TX Frequency

Selection Free Marine ROM

Marine

Free 1 2 3 0

*9903 RX Frequency


Marine

Free 0 0 0 0

*9904 TLX Usage TX/RX RX Disable 0 0 0 0

*9905 TLX RX Bandwidth Wide

(2.4kHz)

Narrow

(0.4kHz) 1 1 1 1

*9906 TX Delay Time 5 to 50m sec 10m sec

*9907 Power Reduction on

2182kHz Enable Disable 0 0 1 0

*9908 AM Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2182kHz

only RX+2182 1 1 1 1

*9909 LSB Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2 2 2 2

*9910 FAX Usage RX Disable 1 1 1 1

*9911 Emission Mode on

2182kHz H3E USB

H3E

FIX J3E FIX 3 3 3 3

*9912 Alarm TX Time 45 sec No limit Disable 0 0 0 0

*9913 Test Alarm

Transmission Disable Enable 1 1 1 1

*9914 Test Alarm Frequency 1605.0 – 29999.9kHz 2191kHz

*9915 TX TUNE Enable Disable Auto 0 0 0 0

*9916 Remote Control

Format MIF TBUS 0 0 0 0

*9917 EM Mode with TX

Key ON from external equipment

Auto

(No

change)

SSB H3E TLX 0 0 0 0

9918 Key Response Beep OFF ON 1 1 1 1

9919 Noise Blanker OFF ON 1 1 1 1

9920 AGC OFF ON MODE 2 2 2 2

*9921 Clarifier Change

Width ±150Hz ±100Hz 0 0 0 0

*9922 IA/RF Meter IA RF 0 0 0 0

*9923 ITU Channel Std USA Std+MF 2 2 2 2

*9924 Channel/Frequency

Display Channel Frequency 1 1 1 1

Ver 09

Ver 09

Ver 09

Ver-09:Changed from Ver-09

FS-1562

A1-4

Setting Default System

Channel Function

0 1 2 3 4 Std Italy Hol-

land Other

*9925 Default setting of

Power Data

Press [RCL] [1] [ENT] key to restore to default

setting

*9926 Tuning Circuit for RX Enable Disable 1 1 1 1

*9928 Priority setting on

2182kHz FS-1562

RB-500

(Remote) 0 0 0 0

9951 Scan Stop Signal

Level

SQ

Level S : 1 to 10 S=3 S=3 S=3 S=3

9952 Scan Stop Time While

receiving 1 – 99 sec 2sec 2sec 2sec 2sec

9953 Sweep Width 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 100k 100k 100k 100k

9954 Sweep Step

Frequency 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 1.00k 1.00k 1.00k 1.00k

9955 Squelch Operation Voice S-Level Voice + S-Level

Voice or S-Level 3 3 3 3

9956 Squelch Level S : 0 to 10 S=5 S=5 S=5 S=5

9957 Squelch Delay Time 500 to 4000m sec 1000

ms

1000

m

1000

ms

1000

ms

9958 Squelch Activating

Frequency 500 to 2000Hz

1000

Hz

1000

Hz

1000

Hz

1000

Hz

9959

Squelch Activation frequency when

2-tone alarm 2182kHz is received

No

change 1300Hz (Open) 1 1 1 1

*9997 Selection of output

power

150W AT-1560

-15

250W AT-5000

250W AT-1560

-25 0 0 0 0

*9998 User CH Memory & Power ADJ Enable Disable 1 1 1 1

*9999 Password Enter Password:1562 to access (*) mark channel

Confirm the following system settings for GMDSS.

9904 (TLX Usage) 0:TX/RX default

9905 (TLX RX band width) 1:Narrow default

9906 (TX Delay Time) 10 m sec default

9908 (AM Usage) 1:RX default

9911 (EM on 2182kHz) 3:J3E FIX default

9915 (TX Tune) 0:Enable default

9916 (Remote control format) 0:MIF default

9917 (EM with TX key ON) 0:Auto (No change) default 9997 (Selection of out put power) 0:FS-1562-15 2:FS-1562-25

9928 (Priority setting) 1:Remote (When DSC-60 is connected.)

Ver 07

Ver-07:Changed from Ver-07

Ver07

FS-1562

A1-5


: Different “setting” between Ver-3 and Ver-9.

Add.

Add.

Add.

FS-1562

A1-6

2.4 System settings descriptions

FS-1562

A1-7

2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation 1. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, turn on the power. All LCD segment

appear.

2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key.

3. Press keys one by one. When the key is pressed, the corresponding number or letter

appears at the upper right of LCD. See table below.

All LCD segments reappear several seconds after the 2 key is pressed.

FS-1562

A1-8

3. Channel Programming

System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. The FS-1562 can store up to 200 user channels, number 1 to 200.

Procedure

1. While pressing and holding down the [RCL] key, turn the power on.

2. Select the system channel 9999 by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.

3. Press the [RCL] [1] [5] [6] [2] and [ENT] keys in this order. (Password)

4. Select the system channel 9998.

5. Press the [RCL] [0] and [ENT] keys to enable channel programming.

6. Select an RX channel to be programmed, by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.

Operating the FREQ/CH encoder changes the display as below.

7. Select emission mode with the [MODE] key.

8. To enter an RX frequency, press the [RCL] key and enter a frequency with the

number keys, then press the [ENT] key.

9. Select a TX channel of the same channel as RX with the FREQ/CH encoder.

10. Enter a TX frequency as follows.

Simplex

Press the [ENT] key. The same frequency entered at step 8 is stored.

Duplex

Press the [RCL] key, enter a frequency with the numeral keys, then press the

[ENT] key.

FS-1562

A1-9

11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10.

12. Set the system channel 9998 to “1” (user channel memory: disable).

13. Turn the power off to store channel programmed.

To erase a user channel

1. Select an RX channel to erase with the FREQ/CH encoder.

2. Press the [RCL] [0] [ENT] keys in this order.

3. Rotate the FREQ/CH encoder clockwise by one turn to select a TX channel of the

same channel as RX.

4. Press the [RCL] [0] [ENT] keys in this order.

To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.

FS-1562

A1-10

4. Power Date Setting

System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”.

1. Turn the power on.

2. Select a channel (Frequency). Referring to next page; Power data setting table.

3. Press the TX TUNE key. “TUNE” appears and the coupler starts tuning. When the

tuning is completed successfully, “TUNE OK” appears.

4. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, press the [8] ,[9] or [7] key

for HI, LOW, and TUNE respectively.

[ENT] + [8] HI Power

[ENT] + [9] LOW Power

[ENT] + [7] TUNE Power

Power data appears FS-1562-15 FS-1562-25 Power data

Default Range of adjustment Default Range of adjustment High power 220 (LOW data+1) to 255 120 (LOW data+1) to 150 Low power 40 HI data – 1 35 HI data – 1 Tune power 20 0 to 60 0 0 to 10

5. Set the power data by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. (Observe the readout on power

meter, If connected, while pressing the PTT switch and whistling or speaking into the

handset.)

6. Press the [ENT] key to register power data. Power data disappears from the LCD.

7. To set another channel, repeat steps 2 top 6.

Normally this adjustment factory adjusted is

not necessary. The tune power set on a

channel can be used on all channel.

FS-1562

A1-11

Power data setting table

Note)

Power data for user channel is commonly used for all class of emission.

The table below shows output power calculated from power data when 50 ohms dummy

load is connected to the transceiver unit. Reference only.

Condition; 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset).

Power data 255 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 10 0

150W 180 178 153 132 112 92 76 61 48 34 23 18 15 8 8 Output Power 250W 150:

345 320 260 200 160 115 80 50 35 25

FS-1562

A1-12

5. Self test

5.1 Transceiver unit

When the CPU is detected unlock signal from SYN circuit, frequency indication

blinking.

Condition: TLX mode 13.5MHz AGC ON

Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz PA OFF

Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz 20W/Full power

FS-1562

A1-13

5.2 Antenna coupler unit The CPU and the relays which select capacitors and coil for tuning can be checked.

Procedure

1. Open the antenna coupler cover.

2. Open the shield cover inside the coupler.

3. Turn on No.2 of the DIP switch S2.

4. Press the TUNE switch in the antenna coupler.

5. The 24 LEDs (CR1 to CR24) light one by one 1 second each.

6. Turn off No.2 of the DIP switch S2.

7. Close the covers.

If CPU error is detected, CR1 light for ROM error, CR2 for RAM error, CR3 for A/D

converter error. (ROM/RAM/AD converter incorporated in the CPU.)

1. Connection

Section A2. FS-75/2550

A2-1

FS-75 (150W)

FS-2550 (250W)

AT-1560-15

AT-1560-25

AT-1560-25

FS-75/2550

A2-2

2. System settings 2.1 Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [CH] key, turn the power on. You get the following display.

2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. 3. Press the [CH] [7] [5] and [ENT](入力入力入力入力) keys in this order. (75 is the password.) 4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. 5. Press the [CH] key, enter a setting number to be set, and press the [ENT] key. 6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5. 7 .To restore normal operation, turn the power off, and on again.

99513

MEMO

System Channel

Setting No.

FS-75/2550

A2-3

Ver 07

Ver 09

Ver 09


Ver-09 Setting Default System

Channel Function

0 1 2 3 4 SSB GMDSS *9900 Country of Delivery SSB GMDSS 0 1 *9901 User Channel Clear Press [CH] [1] [ENT] key to clear

*9902Note-1 TX Frequency


Marine Free

3 3

*9903Note-1 RX Frequency


Marine Free

0 0

*9904 TLX Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2 0

*9905 TLX RX Bandwidth Wide

(2.4kHz)

Narrow (0.4kHz)

1 1

*9906Note-2 TX Delay Time 5 to 50m sec 10m sec

*9907 Power Reduction on

2182kHz Enable Disable 0 0

*9908Note-3 AM Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2182kHz

only RX+2182kHz 1 1

*9909 LSB Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2 2 *9910 FAX Usage RX Disable 1 1

*9911 Emission Mode on

2182kHz USB J3E FIX 3 3

*9912 Alarm TX Time 45 sec Disable 0 0 *9915Note-5 TX TUNE Enable Disable Auto 0 0

*9917Note-7 EM Mode with TX

Key ON from external equipment

Auto (No

change) SSB H3E TLX 0 0

9918 Key Response Beep OFF ON 1 1 9919 Noise Blanker OFF ON 1 1 9920 AGC OFF ON MODE 1 1 *9922 IA/RF Meter IA RF 0 0 *9923 ITU Channel Std USA Std+MF 0 0

*9925 Default setting of

Power Data Press [CH] [1] [ENT] key to restore to default setting Note-11

*9926Note-8 Tuning Circuit for RX Enable Disable 1 1

*9927 Recall of 27MHz CH

frequencies Disable Enable 0 0

*9928 Priority setting on

2182kHz FS-75/2

550 RB-500 (Remote)

0 0

Ver 07: Changed from Ver 07 Ver 09: Changed from Ver09

Ver 09

FS-75/2550

A2-4

Setting Default System

Channel Function

0 1 2 3 4 SSB GMDSS

9951 Scan Stop Signal

Level SQ

Level S : 1 to 10 S=3 S=3

9952 Scan Stop Time While receiving

1 – 99 sec 0 0

9953 Sweep Width 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 100k 100k

9954 Sweep Step Frequency

0.01 to 29999.99kHz 1.00k 1.00k

9955 Squelch Operation Voice S-Level Voice + S-Level

Voice or S-Level 3 3

9956 Squelch Level S : 0 to 10 S=5 S=5 9957Note-9 Squelch Delay Time 500 to 4000m sec 1000ms 1000m

9958 Squelch Activating

Frequency 500 to 2000Hz 1000Hz 1000Hz

9959

Squelch Activation frequency when

2-tone alarm 2182kHz is received

No change

1300Hz (Open) 0 0

9960 Check meter on

display Individual All 1 1

*9997Note-10 Selection of output power

150W AT-1560

-15

250W AT-5000

250W AT-1560

-25 0 0

*9998 User CH Memory & Power ADJ Enable Disable 1 1

*9999 Password Enter Password:75 to access (*) mark channel

Conform the following system setting for GMDSS.

9904 (TLX Usage) 0:TX/RX GMDSS default 9905 (TLX RX band width) 1:Narrow SSB/GMDSS default 9906 (TX Delay Time) 10 m sec SSB/GMDSS default 9908 (AM Usage) 1:RX SSB/GMDSS default 9911 (EM on 2182kHz) 3:J3E FIX SSB/GMDSS default 9915 (TX Tune) 0:Enable SSB/GMDSS default 9917 (EM with TX key ON) 0:Auto(No change) SSB/GMDSS default 9997 (Selection of output power)

0:FS-75 2:FS-2550 (AT-1560-25 installed) 9928 (Priority setting) 1 (When DSC-60 is connected.)

FS-75/2550

A2-5

2.3 System settings descriptions

Not use

Not use

FS-75/2550

A2-6

2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation 1. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, turn on the power. All LCD segment

appear.

2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key.

3. Press keys one by one. When the key is pressed, the corresponding number or letter

appears at the upper right of the LCD. See table below.

Ex.) The 2 key is pressed.

All LCD segments reappear several seconds after the 2 key is pressed.

111 - - - - - 1

0158100

Key indication

ROM Version No.

Key

Indication

Key

Indication

Key

Indication

Key

Indication

0

0

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

7

7

8 9

8 9

A b

C d E F

2182

Cursor

Freq.

CH

ENTALARM

FS-75/2550

A2-7

3. Channel Programming System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. The FS-75/2550 can store up to 200 user channels, See the table below.

Band(MHz) Channel 0 1-10 1 1-10 2 1-10 3 1-10 4 1-20 6 1-20 8 1-20

12 1-20 16 1-20 18 1-20 22 1-20 25 1-20

Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [CH] key, turn the power on. 2. Select the system channel 9999 by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. 3. Press the [CH] [7] [5] and [ENT] keys in this order. (Password) 4. Select the system channel 9998. 5. Press the [CH] [0] and [ENT] keys to enable channel programming. 6. Select an RX channel to be programmed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.

Operating the FREQ/CH encoder changes the display as below.

7. Select the emission mode with the [MODE] key. 8. To enter an RX frequency, press the [Freq] key and enter a frequency with the

number keys, then press the [ENT] key. 9. Select a TX channel of the same channel as RX with the FREQ/CH encoder.

0.00 Frequency

Channel

Band

0 - 01

R

MEMOJ3E

0-01 R 0-01 T

25-20 T

25-20 R------

------ 99009998

9999

FS-75/2550

A2-8

10. Enter a TX frequency as follows. Simplex Press the [ENT] key. The same frequency entered at step 8 is stored. Duplex Press the [Freq] key, enter a frequency with the numeral keys, then press the [ENT] key. 11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10. 12. Set the system channel 9998 to “1” (user channel memory: disable). 13. Turn the power off to store channels programmed. To erase a user channel 1. Select an RX channel to be erased with the FREQ/CH encoder. 2. Press the [Freq] [0] [ENT] keys in this order. 3. Rotate the FREQ/CH encoder clockwise by one turn to select a TX channel of the

same channel as RX. 4. Press the [Freq] [0] [ENT] keys in this order. To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.

FS-75/2550

A2-9

4. Power Date Setting System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. 1. Turn the power on. 2. Select a channel (Frequency). Referring to next page; Power data setting table. 3. Press the TX TUNE key. “TUNE” appears and the coupler starts tuning. When the

tuning is completed successfully, “TUNE OK” appears. 4. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, press the [8] , [9] or [7] key

for HI, LOW, and TUNE respectively. [ENT] + [8] HI Power

[ENT] + [9] LOW Power

[ENT] + [7] TUNE Power

FS-75 FS-2550 Power data Default Range of adjustment Default Range of adjustment

High power 220 (LOW data+1) to 255 120 (LOW data+1) to 150 Low power 40 HI data – 1 35 HI data – 1 Tune power 20 0 to 60 0 0 to 10

5. Set the power data by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. (Observe the readout on power

meter, if connected, while pressing the PTT switch and whistling or speaking into the handset. Or press [0]:tone key, then while pressing the PTT switch.)

6. Press the [ENT] key to register power data. Power data disappears from the LCD. 7. To set another channel, repeat steps 2 to 6.

Normally this adjustment factory adjusted is

not necessary. The tune power set on a

channel can be used on all channel.

FS-75/2550

A2-10

Power data setting table

Note) Power data for user channel is commonly used for all classes of emission. The table below shows output power calculated from power data when 50 ohms dummy load is connected to the transceiver unit. Reference only. Condition) 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset)

Power data 255 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 10 0

150W 180 178 153 132 112 92 76 61 48 34 23 18 15 8 8 Output Power 250W 150:

345 320 260 200 160 115 80 50 35 25

FS-75/2550

A2-11

5. Self Test 5.1 Transceiver unit This test checks the transceiver for proper operation. It should be conducted regularly to ensure proper operation. Before starting the test, set the RF GAIN control knob to maximum (fully clockwise). Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [CURSOR] key, turn on the power. All LCD

segments appear. 2. Release the hand from the [CURSOR] key. The FS-75/2550 starts self-test and the

display shows the following indications in order.

When the CPU is detected unlock signal from SYN circuit, frequency indication blinking.

Condition: TLX mode 13.5MHz AGC ON

Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz PA OFF

Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz 20W/Full power

FS-75/2550

A2-12

5.2 Antenna coupler unit The CPU and the relays which select capacitors and coil for tuning can be checked. Procedure 1. Open the antenna coupler cover. 2. Open the shield cover inside the coupler. 3. Turn on No.2 of the DIP switch S2. 4. Press the TUNE switch in the antenna coupler. 5. The 24 LEDs (CR1 to CR24) light one by one for 1 second each. 6. Turn off No.2 of the DIP switch S2. 7. Close the covers. If CPU error is detected, CR1 lights for ROM error, CR2 for RAM error, CR3 for A/D converter error. (ROM/RAM/AD converter incorporated in the CPU.)

Section A3. FS-5000/8000

1. Connection The below installation is the connected for FS-5000. Note) FS-8000 Transceiver unit : FS-8000T Control unit : FS-5000C AC/DC Power supply : PR-850A x 2sets

A3-1

FS-5000/8000

A3-2

2. System settings Change the specifications with the following key sequence. 1. Press [STO] key. 2. Enter item number (system setting No.), and press [ENT] key. 3. Setting number desired, and press [ENT] key.

Ex) [STO] [9] [9] [0] [1] [ENT] [0] [ENT]

Reference; A power supply is only connected with the controller unit (FS-5000C), while pressing and holding the [ENT] key, turn on the power. Controller working individually. and system settings of FS-5000 can be done. 2.1 System Channel List The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item.

Ver-21

System setting No. Channel No. Function

0 1 2 3 4 9900 Model FS-5000 FS-2500 FS-1600 FS-8000 9901 TX freq. Selection Free Limited ROM Marine 9902 N.C.

9903 Output power of transceiver unit on MF band 400W 150W 50W

9904 Class of emission on 2182kHz AM SSB SSB FIX

9905 TX tune

Enable Disable Auto (Tuning is done when

setting TX freq.)

9906 Scan of TX channel Enable Disable 9907 Time display format Japan USA Europe 9908 Second unit display Enable Disable 9909 Display of class of emission NOR(SSB) ITU(J3E)

9910 Numerical display of check meter data Disable Enable

9911 Test alarm RX TX 9912 Test alarm freq. 2191kHz (Selectable) 9913 TX delay time 30ms (Selectable:5-99ms) Note) FS-8000:10ms 9914 Alarm sending time 45sec (Selectable:1-9999s) 9915 Check meter items Full Short

9916 Keyboard lock (controlled by [*]key) OFF Lock Intercom

FS-5000/8000

A3-3

Setting No. Channel No. Function

0 1 2 3 4 9917 50 ohm BK. relay ON/OFF ON (Fixed) 9918 Time adj. (Clock) Auto Manual 9919 Control unit priority NO 1 (Local) 2 (Remote) 9920 Beep sound ON/OFF OFF ON (Fixed) 9921 Beep sound level 6 (Selectable:0-10) 9922 Beep sound freq. 2000Hz (Selectable:100-3000Hz)

9923 Dummy Enable Disable Shortening capacitor

9924 Lower limit 2500kHz

9925

Freq. rang in which shortening capacitor tunes on. (9923 should be set at "2") Upper limit 3999.9kHz

9926 Test tone Enable Disable

9927 Power reduction on 2182/2187.5kHz Enable Disable

9928 Minimum output power Less then 60W

60W or more

9930 Data to "REM1" terminal MIF

(4800bps) TBUS CIF NMEA MIF 2

(1200bps)


(4800bps) TBUS CIF NMEA MIF 2

(1200bps)


(4800bps) TBUS CIF NMEA

MIF 2 (1200bps)

9933 Data to "CIF" terminal MIF (4800bps)

TBUS CIF NMEA MIF 2 (1200bps)

9934 Class of emission of TX/RX, when unit connected to "REM1" is once keyed.

No change SSB AM TLX





9937 Class of emission of TX only while unit connected to "REM1" is keyed.






FS-5000/8000

A3-4

Setting No. Channel No. Function

0 1 2 3 4

9940 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : SSB (Changeable thru keyboard)

6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9941 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : CW (Changeable thru keyboard)

6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9942 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : TLX (Changeable thru keyboard) 6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9943 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : AM (Changeable thru keyboard)

6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9944 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : R3E (Changeable thru keyboard) 6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9945 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : FAX (Changeable thru keyboard) 6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9946 Receiver bandwidth in kHz : LSB (Changeable thru keyboard) 6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz

9947 Squelch on telex mode No change OFF 9948 Noise blanker on telex mode No change OFF 9949 AGC on telex mode No change FAST 9950 Duplex mode on telex mode No change Disable

9951 Receiving antenna on telex mode (Only when optional R.ANT SEL board is installed.)

Main (Not used)

Dup (Used)

9952 Tx antenna status at reception OFF

(No change) ON

(To GND)

9953 Operation on AM mode T/RX RX only Disable 2182kHz only

9954 Operation on R3E mode T/RX RX only Disable 9955 Operation on FAX mode T/RX RX only Disable 9956 Operation on LSB mode T/RX RX only Disable

9957 Cypher communication (Vs Enable control signal ON/OFF on TB2-10 in FS-5000C unit)

Disable Enable

9960 Recall of 27MHz SSB/DSB freq. Disable Enable 9961 ITU freq. Table selection Standard USA Europe

9962 MF band : 405-526.5kHz transmission (When optional MF tuner : AT-410 is installed.)

Disable Enable

FS-5000/8000

A3-5

Setting Channel No. Function

0 1 2 3 4 9963 User channel programming Enable Disable

9964 FS-8000 only check meter indication for both upper & lower transceiver unit

No Yes

9965 Scan response time (DSC/NBDP) Standard Fast

9966 The transmission of AM tow-tone alarm is restricted or not. Free Limited Disable

9980 Select default setting for each country

Enter international telephone country code 0:standerd 1:USA 31Holland 44:Europe 47:Norway 81:Japan

9981 Dummy load installation (Both functions of 9911 and 9923 are determined.)

NO 9911:RX,

9923:Disable

Yes 9911:TX,

9923:Enable

9982 ANT BK. relay or RX ANT installation (Both functions of 9913 and 9917 are determined.)

NO 9913:30ms,

9917:ON/OFF

Yes 9913:10ms, 9917:ON

9989 Power default setting

(When old type Ant. coupler is installed.)

Europe Norway

9997 All user CH clear Clear

9998 System Lock (Important system setting are not changeable.)

[OFF/ON]: Enter "present time" to change setting.

9999 System initialization (Default) Disable Enable Important) When the ROM change, should be changing both the ROMs of same version number in Control unit and Transceiver unit.

FS-5000/8000

A3-6

2.2 Confirmation of settings To confirm settings, press [RCL] [9] [9] [9] [9] and [ENT] in this order. Then press [ENT] key successively. System setting for GMDSS FS-5000) System channel:9982 (A.BK relay or R.ANT) ---- [1]: YES Note) 9913:System Delay 10 ms 9917:50 ohm BK Relay 1:ON (Permanently) *The 50 ohm BK is installed the TX FIL board.

FS-8000) 9913:System Delay 10 ms 9917:50 ohm BK Relay ON or OFF (depend on installation) *The 50 ohm BK is installed the COMBINER board.

9917: 0 (ON/OFF) 9917: 1 (ON)

“BFO” setting frequency The DSC and NBDP are connected, the BFO frequency should be set to 1700 Hz.

1700 Hz; [BFO] 1700 [ENT]

AT-5000

FS-5000T

Tx/Rx ANT

ANT BK RelayTx Rx

AT-5000

FS-5000T

Tx ANT Rx ANT

Tx Rx

or

AT-5000

FS-8000T

Tx/Rx ANT

Tx/Rx

AT-5000

FS-8000T

Tx ANT Rx ANT

Tx Rx

or

FS-5000/8000

A3-7

2.3 System channel description The following describes about some system channels. 9900

Output power of ITU/DSC channels and direct key-in frequencies are preset as shown below.

Model vs Max. Output Power (*): for Japanese vessels only. FS-5000 FS-2500* FS-1600* FS-8000

Output Power 400W 250W 150W 800W 9901

Free Any frequencies (1.6065 to 29.9999 MHz) can be transmitted by direct key-in.

Limited The frequencies in the ITU/DSC and user channels can be transmitted. ROM Only the frequencies stored in the user channel can be transmitted. Marine Any frequency in the following bands may be transmitted.

1606.5 - 4438 kHz, 5680 kHz 18780 - 18900 kHz, 6200 - 6525 kHz, 19680 - 19800 kHz, 8100 - 8815 kHz, 22000 - 22855 kHz, 12230 - 13200 kHz, 25070 - 25210 kHz, 16360 - 17410 kHz, 26100 - 26175 kHz 9911

To test the transmitter press [TEST] and [START] keys in this order. The dummy load (if equipped) is connected automatically and the test signal of 2191kHz, modulated by two-tone alarm, is sent to the dummy load.

9915

If you select "1" (short), only check data for Ia, Vc, Ic and Pi are displayed repeatedly every pressing of the [CHECK METER] key.

9916

To enable to lock the keys except for [SEND], [START], [2182], and [2187.5] keys, select "1" (ON). Then press the * key to turn on the key lock function. First press of the * key make the keys inactive. (Keyboard Lock [ON]" will be displayed.)

Select "2" (Intercom call), to use the [*] key for intercom call. Note that the AF board 05P0356-33 in the Control Unit is required.

FS-5000/8000

A3-8

9917 Used if installation contains a receiving antenna or ANT BK RELAY board (in

antenna coupler). For high speed switching between receiving and transmitting

(for example, telex) set to "1." Then, TX delay time (system setting 9913) is shortened to "10ms”.

9919 For control unit priority, select the same setting numbers for both control units. *To give priority to No. 1 Control Unit; *To give priority to No. 2 Control Unit; No.1 Control Unit: Setting ”1” No.1 Control Unit : Setting “2” No.2 Control Unit: Setting ”1” No.2 Control Unit : Setting “2” 9923

Setting No. Contents LCD Indication Remarks

“0”(Enable) Dummy load can be switched by DUMMY key.

DUMMY With DUMMY LOAD PCB.

“1”(Disable) DUMMY key is not operative.

--- Without DUMMY LOAD PCB

“2” (Short Cap.)

Shortening capacitor automatically turns on in the range set by 9924/9925. Further, DUMMY key is allowed to turn on/off shortening capacitor.

S.CAP(Shorten-ing capacitor)

With modified DUMMY LOAD PCB

9928

For 1988 SOLAS Convention ships (GMDSS) set this item to "1." Then, minimum output power is automatically set at 60W (power data -- MF:115, HF:110), except for minimum power data already stored into user channel.

9930 - 9932

MIF Furuno Multi Interface for Radio communication. Selected when DP-6, DSC-6 is connected.

TBUS Selected for equipment made by 'Thrane & Thrane A/S" of Denmark. If TBUS data is used, it is not necessary to connect TXD/RXD lines.

9934 – 9936

If you wish to change the class of emission only while the selcall is transmitted and to restore it automatically to previous status after transmission, set the channel Nos. 9934 - 9936 and 9937 to "0" (No change) and "2" (AM), respectively. EX) Selcall is connected REM 1, set to system channel “9934” to “0” and “9937” to “2”..

FS-5000/8000

A3-9

9947

The "1": SQ on Telex [1-OFF] setting automatically turns off the SQ (if ON) when class of emission is changed to TELEX. (Note that AF signal to DP-5/6 is not passed through squelch circuit, so this setting is not for DP-5/6 connection.)

9948

The '1": NB on Telex [1-OFF] setting automatically turns off the NB (if ON) when class of emission is changed to TELEX.

9949 AGC on Telex

*The "1" setting sets AGC to FAST when class of emission is changed to TELEX. 9950 Duplex on Telex

*The "1" setting inhibits DUPLEX mode (unnecessary on TELEX) when class of emission is changed to TELEX.

9952 1: ON (Connected to GND) *This function is available only when the Rx antenna is installed and dummy load

board with antenna earth relay is mounted in the coupler. If you want to connect the Tx antenna to ground manually (irrespective of 9952 setting), press the [DUMMY] key. (For HF band of the FS-8000, this function is operative only when the output power is selected for "Low 2" or less.)

9953 2182 --- Transmission 2182 kHz, Reception all frequencies 9961 ITU Freq. Table [0-Standerd, 1-USA, 2-EU] [2-EU] selection; MF band ITU frequency list added.

FS-5000/8000

A3-10

9966

In accordance with both the above setting and system setting 9953 (Operation on AM mode), the transmission of two-tone alarm on AM mode is as follows:

System setting:9966 System setting:9953 TX of two-tone alarm on AM mode. 0: TX/RX 1: RX only

Possible on all frequencies.

2: No Disabled 0:FREE (Factory setting)

3: 2182 Possible on all frequencies. 0: TX/RX Possible on all frequencies. 1: RX only 2: No

Disabled 1: LIMITED

3: 2182 Possible on 2182 kHz only. 9980

Returns to default setting for each country. For example, enter “44” for Europe. 9981 Determines the functions of 9911 and 9923 as follows:

9981 [0] NO [1] YES 9911: Alarm 0-Receive 1-Transmit

9923 : Dummy 1-Inhibit 0-Enable 9982

Determines the functions of 9913 and 9917 as follows:

9982 [0] NO [1] YES 9913 : System 30 ms 10 ms

9917: 50 ohms BK Relay

0-on/off 1-Permanently on (fixed)

FS-5000/8000

A3-11

9989

Power setting for Europe and Norway type [1-EU, 2-NOR]. Setting of power

data. (When old type Ant. coupler is installed. :05P0358-44 and after)

EU (Europe) Power data NOR (Norway) Power data

FS-5000 225 1.6-2.5MHz FS-5000: 200 FS-8000: 160 1.6-2.5MHz FS-8000 160 2.5-4.0MHz FS-5000: 210 FS-8000: 160

4.0-30MHz FS-5000: 225 FS-8000: 160 9998 Ex) Preset time is 12 : 35. Press 1235 [ENT] in this order to turn on or off the system lock function.

The following system settings are not changeable when you turn on the system lock function.

* STO FULL (or LOW) Power Adjustment * STO 9900 Model 9901 Tx freq. selection 9903 Output power of SSB on MF band 9914 Alarm sending time 9960 Recall 27MHz freq. 9999 System initialization

FS-5000/8000

A3-12

2.4 Default setting for each country [STO] [9] [9] [8] [0] [ENT] Country code [ENT] The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item. The system channel that it isn't mentioned in the below list is the same as standard setting. Refer to section “2.1 System Channel List”. Country Code List

Setting Country Code CH No. Function

0 1 2 3 4 0: Standard 1:USA 31:

Holland 44: EU

47: Norway

81: Japan

Types of delivery for each country - U - S N K 9901 TX freq. Selection Free Limited ROM Marine 0 0 3 0 3 0

9903 Output power of transceiver unit on MF band

400W 150W 50W

0 1 0 0 0 2

9904 Class of emission on 2182kHz AM SSB SSB

FIX

2 2 2 2 2 2

9907 Time display format Japan USA Europe 0 1 2 2 2 0

9910 Numerical display of check meter data

Disable Enable

0 0 0 0 0 1

30 30 30 30 10 30 9913

TX delay time 30ms (Selectable:5-99ms) Note) FS-8000:10ms *Upper:FS-5000 *Lower:FS-8000 10 10 10 10 10 10

9917 50 ohm BK. relay

ON/OFF ON

(Fixed)

0 0 0 0 1 0

9923 Dummy Enable Disable Shortening capacitor 1 1 1 1 1 1

9926 Test tone Enable Disable 0 1 1 1 1 0

9927 Power reduction on 2182/2187.5kHz Enable Disable 0 1 1 1 1 0

9928 Minimum output power

Less then 60W

60W or more

0 1 1 1 1 0

9950 Duplex mode on telex mode

No change

Disable

0 0 1 0 0 0

9953 Operation on AM mode

T/RX RX only Disable 2182kHz

only

1 1 1 1 1 0

9954 Operation on R3E mode T/RX RX only Disable

0 0 1 1 1 1

9955 Operation on FAX mode

T/RX RX only Disable

0 0 1 1 1 1

9956 Operation on LSB mode

T/RX RX only Disable

0 0 1 1 1 1

9957

Cypher communication (Vs Enable control signal ON/OFF on TB2-10 in FS-5000C unit)

Disable Enable

0 0 0 0 0 1

9961 ITU freq. Table selection Standard USA Europe

0 1 2 2 2 0

FS-5000/8000

A3-13

3. Jumper settings 3.1 For NAV data format selecting, CIF or NMEA Jumper wire setting on AF board selects data format to be received. Referring to next page. In addition, system setting for “9933:Data to CIF terminal” port must be set.

[STO] 9 9 3 3 [ENT] 0: MIF(4800bps) 1: TBUS 2: CIF

3: NMEA 4: MIF2(1200bps)

3.2 When using C.Loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500 Put a jumper wire on the AF board to use current loop format. Refer to the next page for locatin of parts on AF board having suffix number –33 and after. In addition confirm the system setting for “9931:Data to REM 2 terminal” port. To connect with the DB-500 (C.Loop) or RB-500, setting should be as below.

[STO] 9 9 3 1 [ENT] 0: MIF(4800bps) 1: TBUS 2: CIF

3: NMEA 4: MIF2(1200bps) Jumper wire: Short (Current Loop)

FS-5000C Nav device

FURUNORadio EquipmentEX)RB-500

orCIF/NMEA(TXD/RXD)

TB-4

MIF(4800bps)

NMEA

FS-5000/8000

A3-14

CIF/NMEA

*CIF NMEA: Open, CIF: Short *NMEA NMEA: Short, CIF: Open

REM2 *C.Loop Short *RS-232C Open

FS-5000/8000

A3-15

4. User (Preset) Channel Programming The 'TX freq. selection" (9901) is set to "1" (Free), so you may store frequencies by recalling the ITU/DSC channels or by keying in a frequency through the keyboard. Select class of emission, bandwidth, and frequency, then press the following keys to store the frequencies (class of emission & BW as well) into the user channel. [STO] (User CH No.) [ENT] [ENT] *User CH No. : 1 to 8999 CH (storage capacity: 400 CH) Execute the following key sequence to store ITU frequencies (class of emission & BW as well) into the user channel. [ITU] (ITU CH No.) [ENT]

[STO] (User CH No.) [ENT] [ENT] Note) To see stored user channels, press [RCL] 9998 [ENT]. To erase a user channel, press [STO] “User CH No.” [ENT] [0] [ENT].

FS-5000/8000

A3-16

5. Power Adjustment

FS-5000/8000

A3-17

FS-5000/8000

A3-18

FS-5000/8000

A3-19

FS-5000/8000

A3-20

FS-5000/8000

A3-21

6. Self test 6.1 Transceiver unit

FS-5000/8000

A3-22

6.2 Antenna Coupler unit Old type antenna coupler

New type antenna coupler (05P0358-44 and after)

To check the antenna coupler for proper operation, press the CHCK button (S2) on the coupler board. The relay start chattering and LED’s CR1 to CR24 blink one by one in ascending order. If device failure is found, an appropriate LED lights to indicate the offending device:

Device LED ROM CR1 RAM CR2 A/D converter CR3

Note) ROM, RAM, A/D converter are incorporated in the CPU.

1. Connection

DSC-5 Rear View

DSC-5 configurations

MF/HF system

*DSC-5 + AA-50 + FS-1562/5000/8000 + DP-5/6

*DSC-5 + AA-50 + FS-1562/5000/8000 + DP-5/6 + RV-118G/128G

*DSC-5 + AA-50 + FT-258/508 + RV-118G/128G + DP-5/6

*DSC-5A (with 2187.5kHz WR) + FS-1562/5000/8000 + (DP-5/6)

VHF system

*DSC-5 + FM-7000 (with Channel 70 watch receiver)

*DSC-5V (with Channel 70 WR) + FM-7000

Section B1. DSC-5

B1-1

DSC-5

B1-2

MF/HF System

VHF System

Not use.

Note) key-lock command: Priority command

DSC-5

B1-3

2. Changing System Settings and MMSI number

2.1 Changing system settings

To change system settings;

1. Press the [SETUP] key at the default display followed by pressing the [FILE] key

within two or three seconds.

2. Select “I” by pressing the [SELCT] key several times.

3. Then, press the [ENT] key.

4. Enter cipher code 652111.

5. Enter self ID code followed by pressing the [ENT] key.

6. Enter group ID code followed by pressing the [ENT] key.

Note) When own ship is not assignment to Group ID, set to “011111111”.

7. Enter cipher code 652111 again.

8. Select “ON” then press the [ENT] key. “TEST” indication blinks.

Self-ID : 431456789

Group-ID : 011111111

MES AD -------- I

Self-ID : ?

Group-ID :?

*Ready for filing* S:431456789 G:011111111

Ignore ID < > ON OFF

TEST

Here !!

You can enter new ID number.

DSC-5

B1-4

9. You can change (set) following settings.

*Selection (VHF or MF/HF) of communication equipment.

[SETUP] - [4]

*”COMM” setting in the PROG menu.

[SELECT] - [PROG] --- [COMM]

*Tx-key timing setting in the “SYS” sub menu.

[SELECT] - [PROG] - [SYST] --- “key”

*Further, ”TO” (Test tone) in the self test can be done.

[SELECT] [PROG] [TEST] --- “TO”

Refer to Setting List for details.

10. After changing the settings, set the “Ignore ID” in the “TO” test to “OFF” for

normal operation by taking the steps below.

TEST

Watch

[SELECT]

[ENT]

[ENT]

CALL ----- PROG

TIME ----- TEST

[ENT]

NARK ----- ID

[ENT]

MO TO -----

Self test < >

[ENT]

ON OFF

Ignore ID < >

Returns to default display

Select "PROG"

Select "TEST"

Select "TO"

Select "ID"

Select "OFF" Important !!

DSC-5

B1-5

2.2 Settings List

For MF/HF DSC system

Standard type

Added Receiver type

For VHF DSC system

DSC-5 AA-50

DMC-5

DP-5/6

FS-5000 -8000

FS-1562DB

AA-50/DSC

NBDP

DSC

REM-B REM-A

REM1-3

REM1-3

MF/HF TR

MF/HF RX

CIF/NMEAE

D

REM

DP-5/6 DB-500DB-120

orA

B

C

Note) The AA-50 is not required when DSC-5A is installed.

Note)

Printer

PP-500 -510

DMC

DSC-5

AA-50

RCV

DP-5/6

FS-5000 -8000

FS-1562DBDSC

NBDP

DSC

REM-B REM-A

REM1-3

REM1-3

MF/HF TR

MF/HF RX

CIF/NMEA

E

D

REM

REM

DP-5/6 DB-500DB-120

orA

B

C

RV-118G 128G

MF-HF T/R

Note) The AA-50 is not required when DSC-5A is installed.

Note)

Printer

PP-500 -510

DMC

DMC-5

DSC-5/5V FM-7000VHF

DMC

REM-1CIF/NMEA

EDA

B

C

Note) DSC-5V is equipped with CH70 WR.Printer

PP-500 -510

DMC-5

DSC-5

B1-6

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item.

Setting List

Key operation Settings MF/HF DSC System Item

1 2 3 4 5 6 Standard Add. RCV

VHF System

Note

Select XMITR

[4]:XMITR MF/HF VHF

MMSI [FILE] I Own ID Group ID

[SET UP]

[FILE] I Group ID TIME TIME Date & UTC

Line out level

LINE 0dBm 1dBm

CIF NAV device

selection

CIF/ NMEA

NMEA CIF or NMEA

Jumper setting:

CONT pcb JP-1/2

ON DMC connection

REM-A OFF

ON or OFF ON:DMC-5 connected

OFF VHF

VHF+CH70 VHF

connection REM-B

TERM

OFF

No.1VHF: VHF

No.2VHF VHF+ CH70

OFF NBDP VHF

NBDP connection

REM-C

TERM

OFF or NBDP OFF NBDP:DP connected

WR RT XT

ON

TERM WR RT XT

HF TR connection

REM-D

OFF

TERM

ON-WR ON-RT OFF-XT

OFF WR RCV

HF RX connection

COMM

REM-E

TERM

WR WR OFF

A1A:ON NBDP remote

NBDP A1A:OFF

ON OFF

DIS URG SAF BUS

EXT ALM ALARM

ROU

DIS

AUTO 0.5 /

Tx key timing

[SELECT] PROG

SYST

KEY

15

AUTO 0.5

DSC-5

B1-7

Key operationKey operationKey operationKey operation Setting value

MF/HF DSC System Item 1 2 3 4 5 6

Standard RCV VHF

System Note

QUICK Printer selection

PRT SLOW

QUIK Quick: PP-500/510 connected

Ver check DSC & MODEM Ver BEEP

1:lineout 2:line in 3:DMC TxD 4:DMC

RxD 5:CIF

TxD

MO

6:CIF RxD

BEEP or 1 For monitor test

TO RR RL LL MC K D

Monitor selection

[SELECT] PROG SYST

TEST

P

--

ABLE NR

/

AUTO ACK

setting

[6]: AUTO- ACK

UN- ABLE

MOD

ABLE

0 /

DIS/URG ALM type TYPE

9 1

ON Key click ON/OFF KEY

OFF ON

ON ALM ON /OFF

[7]: VOL

ALM OFF

ON

F1 T2189.5/R2177.0 F2 T4208.0/R4219.5 F3 T6312.5/R6331.0 F4 T8415.0/R8436.5 F5 T12577.5/R12657.0

Scan freq. setting

[5]: SCAN

F6 T16805.0/R16903.0

Not used

Recommend to

International Freq

(To cannel scan freq.,set the RX freq. as 99999.9.)

AUTO Printer ON/OFF setting

[0]: PRINT MANU

AUTO

Manual position

[SETUP]

[1]:POSITION When NAV device is not connected.

To cancel the manually entered data. Enter 9999

for the UTC.

DSC-5

B1-8

3. Jumper wire settings

Note)

CIF/NMEA selection must be also made through the menu;

Select the PROG menu and call the COMM menu, then select CIF/NMEA selection

mode. (COMM menu can be called only when “Ignore ID” is set to “ON” .)

DSC-5A only

Format JP 1 JP 2 CIF (default) Open Short

NMEA Short Open

DSC-5

B1-9

4. Self test

Pressing the [3] key at normal display, automatically starts the daily test. The test checks

the MODEM, Remote line and the connection between DSC, MF/HF RT and NBDP

with MIF commands.

DSC-5

B1-10

5. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM

After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working

properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on

the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.


2. Press the NMI switch.

For DSC-5/5A (1) The power is automatically cut off.

(2) Turn the power on manually.

For DSC-5R Since the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on

the screen, turn the power off and on manually.

3. The screen should look something like this:

NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM

RAM clear

1. When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key;

For DSC-5/5A (1) The power is automatically cut off.

(2) Turn the power on again manually.

For DSC-5R Turn the power off and on again manually.

2. The default display appears.

Watch

DSC-5

B1-11

EEROM clear

The PROG menu (returns to default settings) and clears self-ID code, etc.

You must do setup of system !! Refer to section “2.2 settings list”.

1. When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key;

Note) If you want to print out the contents of the EEROM, place the cursor on the

“EEROM” position and press the [0]: print key.

For DSC-5/5A (1) After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off.

(2) Turn the power on manually.

For DSC-5R (1) After about 15 seconds the indication of “Turn off the

power” appears on the screen.

(2) Turn the power off and on manually.


Self-ID ?

Group ID:

Enter self-ID and group-ID codes.

[ENT]

*Ready for filing*

S: G:

[ENT]

Test

Note)

Item Purpose

RAM 1 Clears work area only in the S-RAMs.

RAM 2 Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. Transmitted and received messages, and file prepared in the MES menu.)

EEROM (RAM & EEROM) Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and contents of the PROG menu (returns to default settings) and clears self-ID code, etc.

DSC-5

B1-12

6. DSC Frequency table

DSC-5

B1-13

7. Menu tree

DSC-5

B1-14

DSC-5

B1-15

DSC-5

B1-16

Clearing Manual POS.: Enter to 9999 on UTC.

Clearing SCAN Freq.: Enter to 99999.9 on Rx Freq.

DSC-5

B1-17

8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone

MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission

mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone.

To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below.

The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX).

The MF/HF radiotelephone TX key line and inputting tone signal is controlled by

the DSC-5/5A. The DSC-5/5A muse be set the Ignore ID ON. Refer to section “2.1

Changing System settings”.

Ignore ID ON

TEST

Tone test < >

MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2

Tone test < Space tone >

Now doing

Manual cont out < >IN OUT

Manual cont out < HF Key >

ON

Manual cont out < >

ALM DIS VK VM HK HM HH


OFF

TEST

Select "PROG", press [ENT] key.

Select "TEST", press [ENT] key.

Select "TO", press [ENT] key.

Select "MC", press [ENT] key.

Select "OUT", press [ENT] key.

Select "HK", press [TEST] key.

Select "MARK or Space", press [TEST] key.

Function < >

CALL RCV XMIT PROG

Program < >

TIME COMM SYST TEST

Press [SELECT] key.

MARK tone:1700Hz-85HzSPACE tone:1700Hz+85HzDOT:1700Hz+85Hz

Press [TEST] key.

For example, select "Space".

Press [CANCEL] key several times.


Outputting tone signal

Tx ON

Tx OFF

(Measurment: power and frequency)

MO TO RR RL LL MC K D P

Self test


Self - test

Return to "self test" display.

Don’t select T1 and T2 !!

Fo+85Hz

DSC-5

B1-18

9. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone

The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output

power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70.

The VHF radiotelephone TX key line is controlled by the DSC-5/5V.

The DSC-5/5A muse be set the Ignore ID ON. Refer to section “2.1 Changing System

settings”.

Ignore ID ON

TEST

Tone test < >



Now doing


Manual cont out < VK Key >

ON

Manual cont out < >

ALM DIS VK VM HK HM HH

Manual cont out < VK Key >

OFF

TEST

Select "PROG", press [ENT] key.

Select "TEST", press [ENT] key.

Select "TO", press [ENT] key.




Select "VK", press [TEST] key.

Select "MARK or Space", press [TEST] key.

Function < >

CALL RCV XMIT PROG

Program < >

TIME COMM SYST TEST

Press [SELECT] key.


Press [TEST] key.





Tx ON

Tx OFF

(Measurment: power and frequency)


Self test


Self - testReturn to "self test" display.

or

156.525MHz(+10ppm)


1. Connector on Rear Panel Connect equipment to the DSC-6/6A as shown in the figure which follows.

2. Typical Configurations (Type-1) EX 1) DSC-6 + AA-50 + DP-5/6 + FS-5000

EX 2) DSC-6 + AA-50 + DP-5/6 + FS-1562

Section B2. DSC-6/6A

B2-1

AA-50 FS-1562DBDSC-6

DP-5/6

CIF/NMEA

NBDP

MF/HF Rx DSC MF/HF TR

REM-AREM-B

REM

REM REMREM

AA-50 FS-5000DSC-6

DP-5/6

CIF/NMEA

NBDP


REM-AREM-B

REM3-1

REM1-3

DSC-6

B2-2

Installation Type

Note) RC-1500 and RC-2000-3F: Type-1 (FS-1562 + AA-50 + DSC-6 + DP-5/6) RC-5000 and RC-8000: Type-1 (FS-5000/8000 + AA-50 + DSC-6 + DP-5/6)

Not use

Note) Key-lock command :priority command

DSC-6

B2-3

3. System settings 3.1 Initial settings At power on, the display shown below appears. Enter own ship’s ID (MMSI), data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5 connection, DP-5/6 connection, installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level as below.

Protection OFF Refer to section “3.2 Changing system settings”.

See page B2-2.

DSC-6

B2-4

3.2 Changing System settings The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display.

Note) To release protection for “9:system” menu.

Set up menu < >

TIME 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 0 ALM

Watch

[SELECT]

Set up menu

Important !!

[SELECT] [9]

Select "P" and press [ENT]

Enter cypher code; 652111

Select "OFF" and press [ENT].

Now you may reenter the following* Format of navigator* DMC-5 connection* DP-5/6 connection

* Installation type* TX timming* AF line out level

After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu to "ON" for normal operation.

Select "ON" and press [ENT].Press [CANCEL] several times.

Returns to normal display.

Watch

Watch

System < >

V P ID ----

System < >

V P ID ----

TEST

Protection < >

ON OFF

* System protected *

Protection < >

ON OFF

[SELECT] [9] [ENT][>]

The registered MMSI number is reading only.If you want to change of MMSI number, refer to section "6. Changing ID number".

DSC-6

B2-5

4. System settings list

AA-50FS-5000FS-8000

DMC-5

DSC-6

DP-5/6

NMEA

NMEA

NBDPDMC


REM-AREM-B

REM3-1

REM1-3NMEA data

NMEA data

FS-1562DBTo AA-50

To DP-5/6

or

Note) NMEA –0183 data sentence receiving by DSC-6: GLL, RMA, RMC

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item. Settings list

Set up menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note TIME Mon – day –year -UTC Date & UTC

1 Position L/L & UTC(Auto/Manual) —

To cancel the manually entered data,

enter 9999 for the UTC. Able

NOR || 2 Comply

status Unable MOD

Able Proposal from other

station is acceptable or not.

3 Self test — See S/M Auto Auto/Manual Manual Auto Automatic printing

Quick Type (Printer type) Slow Quick PP-510/500 is connected 4 Print out

EEROM Print out to EEROM content

ON Key click OFF ON

OFF 1.AF OUT For check 2.AF IN For check 3.NMEA Tx Not use 4.NMEA Rx For check 5.DMC Tx For check

6 Sound Monitor

6.DMC Rx

OFF, 1, or 2

For check Message

Address Enter to Group ID 0 MID X5 - X9

Tel No. Work-F

7 File

DSC-F

Installation type; Type-1

DSC-6

B2-6

Set up menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note V (ROM Version) DSC & MODEM

P (Protection) Pass word : 652111

ID (MMSI) Own ID

To clear contents of EE-ROM.

(NMI SW ON) Refer to section “6.

Changing ID number”. NMEA

N/C (NMEA/CIF) CIF NMEA or CIF Refer to section

“5. Jumper setting”. (CONT PCB:J2)

ON ON:DMC is connected DMC (DMC ON/OFF) OFF ON or OFF OFF:DMC is not connect

ON ON:NBDP is connected DP (NBDP ON/OFF) OFF ON or OFF OFF:NBDP is not

connected

1 1 Type-1:RT and DSC is connected

2 2 Type-2:RT, RCV and DSC is connected

3 Not use

RT (Type 1/2/3) (Refer to page DSC6-2)

OFF Auto Auto FURUNO SSB

0.5 sec || K (Tx kye timing)

15 sec

9

System (Protected: Refer to section 3.2 “Changing system settings”.)

L (Line out level) 0dBm 0dBm FURUNO SSB F1 2189.5/2177.0 F2 4208.0/4219.5 F3 6312.5/6331.0 F4 8415.0/8436.5 F5 12577.5/12657.0

0 Scan Freq.

F6 16805.0/16903.0

Recommend to International Freq.

(To cancel scan frequency, set the RX

frequency as 99999.9.)

ON ON/OFF OFF ON ALM Type (DIS and URG) 1 - 9 1

DSC-6

B2-7

5. Jumper setting (Receiver board and CONTROL board)

Note that NMEA/CIF setting in system menu must also be changed. Refer to section “4. System settings list”.

DSC-6

B2-8

6. Changing ID (MMSI) number (Ver-1.05 and after)

Refer to section “7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM”.... Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on.

2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on. 3. The screen should look something like this: 4. Select “EEROM” and press the [ENT] key to clear data on the EEROM. 5. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on again.

The initial setting display appears. (Refer to section “3.1 Initial settings”)

6. Enter own ship’s ID (MMSI), data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5

connection, DP-5/6 connection, Installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level.

Clear <Do not clear>

NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM

TEST

DSC-6

B2-9

7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.

Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on. 3. The screen should look something like this: 4. Clear to RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM.

RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key; The power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually.


NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM

DSC-6

B2-10

EEROM clear

When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key; After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually. The initial setting display appears. (Refer to section “3.1 Initial settings”) Note)

Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the [4] key.

Contents of S-RAM and EEROM Item Purpose


RAM 2 Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. transmitted and received messages, and prepared in messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7])

EEROM

Clears contents of EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] and [ALARM STOP] menu. *Scan programmed frequencies of [SELECT] [0] menu. *Distress massage

*AD/Tel No./Work-F/DSC-F data of [SELECT] [7] in File menu *System setting of [SELECT] [9] menu. MMSI, data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5 connection, DP-5/6 connection, installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level.

TEST

DSC-6

B2-11

8. Self test Pressing the [3] key at normal display, automatically starts the daily test and displays the results. The test checks the MODEM, Remote line and the connection between DSC and MF/HF RT, NBDP in MIF command.

DSC-6

B2-12

9. DSC Frequency table

DSC-6

B2-13

10. Menu list


DSC-6

B2-14

Clearing SCAN Freq.: Enter to 99999.9 on Rx Freq.

Enter to Group ID.

DSC-6

B2-15


MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone. To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX). The MF/HF radiotelephone TX key line and inputting tone signal is controlled by the DSC-6/6A.The DSC-6/6A muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “3.2 Changing System settings”.

Protection OFF

T/A test < tone /signal >

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-FREQ

TEST

Tone test < >



Now doing

T/A test < tone /signal >

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-FREQ



OFF


ON

Manual cont out < >

ALM DIS HK HM HH


OFF

TEST

Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.

Select "MANUAL-CONT", press [ENT] key.


Select "HK", press [ENT] key.

Select "MARK or Space", press [ENT] key.

Press [SELECT], [ ] key.


Press [CANCEL] key twice.


Press [ENT] key.

Press [ENT] key again.



Tx ON (Measurment: power and frequency)


Fo+85Hz

1. Connection

DSC-8V System DSC-8VP System

The difference between the DSC-8V and DSC-8VP is asbelow.

DSC-8V No power supply circuit. Power is supplied from VHF radiotelephone

FM-8000.

(When the FM-8000 is turned on, the power (15VDC) is supplied to

the DSC-8V.)

DSC-8VP Built-in Power board. The DSC-8VP operates from 10.8 to 40.0VDC.

Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP

B3-1

DSC-8V FM-8000VHF RT

REM-1CIF/NMEA

A

B

Printer

PP-500PP -510 PP-500PP -510

DSC-8VP FM-7000VHF RT

REM-1CIF/NMEA

A

B

PrinterDC DC21.6 - 31.2V

POWERPOWER24 VDC 100/220 VAC

POWERPOWER24 VDC 100/220 VAC

DC

10.8 - 40.0V13.5V

DMC-5DMC-5

or or

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-2

2. Changing system settings

The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display.

Note) To release the protection for 9:system and 8:RECEIVER menu, follow the steps below..

Set up menu < >

TIME 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 ALM

Watch

[SELECT]

Set up menu

[SELECT] [9]

Select "P" and press [ENT]

Enter cypher code;652111

Select "OFF" and press [ENT].

Now you may reenter the following

* Format of navigator* DMC-5 connection

* CH70 WR selection* AF line out level

After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu to "ON".

Select "ON" and press [ENT].Press [CANCEL] several times.

Watch

Watch

System < >

V P ID ----

System < >

V P ID ----

TEST

Protection < >

ON OFF


Protection < >

ON OFF


* MMSI

Important !!

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-3


The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting Item.

Settings list

Set up menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note

TIME Mon – day –year -UTC Date & UTC

1 Position L/L & UTC(Auto/Manual) —

To cancel the manually entered data, enter 9999

for the time. Able

NOR ||

2 Comply status Unable

MOD

Able Proposal from other

station Is acceptable or no.

3 Self test — See S/M. Auto Auto/Manual

Manual Auto

Quick Type Slow

Quick PP-510/500 is connected 4 Print out

EEROM Print out to EEROM content

ON Key click OFF

ON

OFF 1.AF OUT 2.AF IN 3.NMEA Tx 4.NMEA Rx 5.DMC Tx

6 Sound Monitor

6.DMC Rx

OFF or 1

For check

(3: Not use)

Message Address Group ID 7 File Tel No.

CH70 No.1 VHF :CH70

8

RECEIVER (Protected:

Refer to section2. Changing

system settings)

VHF No.2VHF :VHF

V (ROM Version) DSC & MODEM P (Protection) Pass word : 652111 ID (MMSI) Own ID

NMEA N/C (NMEA/CIF) CIF

NMEA or CIF Jumper setting. (CONT PCB:J2)

ON ON ON:DMC is connected DMC (DMC ON/OFF) OFF OFF OFF:DMC is not connect

9

System (Protected:

Refer to section2. Changing

system settings)

L (Line out level) 0dBm 0dBm ON ON/OFF OFF

ON ALM

Type (DIS and URG) 0-1 - 9 1

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-4

4. Jumper wire setting

Jumper JP-2 on the CONTROL board selects receiving data format, NMEA or CIF.

CONTROL Board

NMEA/CIF setting is also required through System menu. Refer to section “3. System

setting list”.

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-5

5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM




Procedures

1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on.

2. For DSC-8VP

a, The power is automatically cut off.

b, Turn the power on manually.

For DSC-8V

Since the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on the screen, turn the

power of FM-8000 off and on manually.



NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-6

4. Clear to RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM.

RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear

When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key;

For DSC-8VP


b, Turn the power on again manually.

For DSC-8V

Turn the power off and on again manually.

The normal display appears.

EEROM clear

When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key;

After about 15 second ,

For DSC-8VP


b, Turn the power on again manually.

For DSC-8V

Turn the power off and on again manually.

The initial setting display appears.

(Refer to section “3. System settings list”)

Note)


Contents of S-RAM and EEROM

Item Purpose RAM 1 Clears work area only in the S-RAMs.

RAM 2 Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. transmitted and received messages, and prepared in messages/address/Tel No in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7])

EEROM Clears contents of EEROM. (Own ship’s ID number, etc)

TEST

Watch VHF CH70

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-7

6. Self test

Pressing the [3] key at normal display automatically starts the daily test and displays the

results.

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-8

7. Menu List: [SELECT]


DSC-8V/8VP

B3-9

Enter to Group ID.

DSC-8V/8VP

B3-10




The VHF radiotelephone TX key line is controlled by the DSC-8V/8VP.

The DSC-8V/8VP muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2. Changing

System settings”.

Protection OFF

INSPECTION TEST < >

INSPECTION TEST < >

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-CH

TEST

Tone test < >



Now doing

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-CH


Manual cont out < VHF- Key >

OFF


ON

Manual cont out < >


OFF

TEST


Select "MANUAL-CONT", press [ENT] key.


Select "VK", press [ENT] key.

Select "MARK or Space", press [ENT] key.



Press [CANCEL] key twice.


Press [ENT] key.

Press [ENT] key again.



Tx ON (Measurment: power and frequency)

Don't select T1 and T !!

VK

Tx key ON.

156.525MHz(+10ppm)

B4-1

Section B4. DSC-60

1. Connection

Note) With the optional DSC general watch keeping receiver board, communication by radiotelephone and NBDP is enabled by the MF/HF radiotelephone while watching DSC distress, safety and general frequencies. If DSC general watch keeping receiver board is not installed, DSC general frequency is watched by the MF/HF radiotelephone, and it cannot be watched during communication by radiotelephone and NBDP.

Printer SEL

NBDP(DP-6)

NBDP Terminal (IB or P/C)

Distributor(DB-120/500)

MF/HF RT(FS-xxxx)

Printer(PP-510)

AntennaCoupler

Printer

24V DC

DC24V

NBDP

DSC

COM1

Term

Printer

RT

ANT D.ANT

RT

DMC

RCV BZ

Speaker

Handset

IEC-61162 (NMEA)

IEC-61162 (NMEA)

FAX

-5 +

2.6

m W

hip

Ant

enna

FAX

-5 +

2.6

m W

hip

Ant

enna

DMC Terminal (DMC-5) OR

Distress Button (IC-302)

Nav device

Incomming Indicator (IC-303)

AC/DC Power Supply (PR-300)

RX PCB(05P0703)

DSC/WATCH RECEIVER (DSC-60)

Battery 24V

100/110/200/220V AC

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

Option

OptionOption

RT Antenna

FS-75FS-2550FS-1562FS-2500FS-5000FS-8000

DSC60

B4-2

2. System setup list 2.1 Setup menu: [#/SETUP] The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. The recommended “settings” listed in the table are presumed to be the standard settings. Set them according to user’s requests. In addition to these settings, required are DIP switch settings on the CONTROL/MODEM board.

System setup menu list Setup menu Item setting Note

ON RCVD CALL OFF

ON

ON OLD POSITION OFF

ON

4H 3H 2H 1H

POSITION OLDER

0.5H

4H In the rule, means to activate an alarm when the position information is over 4H old.

DIS/URG ROUTINE

ALL

ALARM

EXT ALARM

OFF

DIS/URG IC-303

ABLE COMPLY TYPE UNABLE

ABLE

ON POSITION CALL OFF

ON

ON

AUTO ACK

POLLING CALL OFF

ON

AUTO POSITION INPUT TYPE MANUAL

AUTO GGA > RMC > RMA > GLL > ZDA

MANUAL XMTD CALL AUTO

MANUAL

MANUAL RCVD CALL AUTO

AUTO When printer is connected, set to AUTO.

MANUAL

PRINT

DAILY TEST AUTO

MANUAL

F1 2M INTL F2 4M INTL F3 6M INTL F4 8M INTL F5 12M INTL

SCAN FREQ.

ROUTINE

F6 16M INTL

Default settings : OFF

DSC60

B4-3

Setup menu Item setting Note

2M FIXED FIXED ON 4M OFF

ON

ON 6M OFF

ON

8M FIXED FIXED ON 12M OFF

ON

ON

SCAN FREQ.

DISTRESS

16M OFF

ON

*MF/HF type: watch keeping 2, 8MHz and other one Freq. *MF type: Fixed on 2MHz. Note)

Depend on “WACTH RCVR” setting in Setup menu-SYSTEM.

ON KEY CLICK OFF

ON

HANDSET 32 32 ADJ.:0-63 ORDINARY

ALARM 8 8 ADJ.:0-63

VOLUME

DISTRESS ALARM

8 8 ADJ.:8-63

MMSI X1–X9 (FIXED)

FIXED With MNI switch set to on, and

enter the password (652111). MF/HF MF/HF type WATCH

RCVR MF MF type Depend on specification.

(Sea area A3:Set to MF/HF type.) LINE OUT

LEVEL 0dBm 0dBm

TX KEY TIMING

AUTO AUTO

MIF IEC RT PORT OFF

MIF When FS-xxxx connected, set to MIF.

ON REMOTE STATION OFF

ON or OFF Depend on specification

OFF NBDP PORT ON

ON or OFF When DP-6 connected, set to ON.

CH DET S LEVEL

OFF – 255 (100)

100 Used for CH busy check.

(Calling category: routine and business used)

INTL

SYSTEM

(PROTECTED)

Pass word: 652111

Note)

REGULATION RUSSIA

INTL Russian vessel: setting to “RUSSINA”

DIST Date & UTC -- Date and UTC indication of transmitted Distress alert

Note) “SYSTEM” menu is protected. To cancel the protection; 1. While displaying DSC normal display, press [SETUP]. The setup menu appears. 2. Select “SYSTEM” by using an arrow key. 3.Press [ENT] key. 4. Confirm that “PROTECTION”: ON is displayed on the bottom line. Type 652111. 5. Then, “PROTECTION” ON is changed to “PROTECTION” OFF, which enables setting of each item. Now you can modify each item in the system setup menu.

Main Ver:2.09

Main Ver:2.09

Main Ver:2.09

DSC60

B4-4

2.2 System menu description 1. MMSI The registered MMSI Number is reading only, that is, can not be changed in this menu. 2. WATCH RCVR (Default setting: MF/HF) This item sets the frequencies of DSC watch keeping receiver.

- MF/HF : Up to 6 scan frequencies can be selected for the reception of MF/HF DSC messages. - MF : The receiver frequency is fixed to 2187.5 kHz. 3. LINE OUT LEVEL (Default setting: 0dBm) Select default setting “0 dBm”, if FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected. This item adjusts the output level from DSC, LINE OUT. The output level can be set at every 1.5 dBm step with the left and right arrow keys. The adjusting range is from –12 to +12 dBm. 4. TX-KEY TIMING (Default setting: AUTO) This item sets the transmission timing between DSC and MF/HF radiotelephone for DSC call. FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set this timing at the default setting “AUTO”. The timing can be set at AUTO, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, or 15 seconds. For example, if the timing is set at 5 seconds, transmitting message is output to the LINE OUT line 5 seconds after [CALL] key has been pressed. If AUTO is selected, LINE OUT signal is output after TUNE OK signal has come back from the radiotelephone. 5. RT-PORT (Default setting: MIF) This item sets the protocol to control the radiotelephone. The setting is made at MIF, IEC, or OFF. If FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set this item at the default setting “MIF”. - MIF: Furuno radiotelephone interface - IEC: IEC-61162-1 - OFF: Radio remote control is turned OFF. Note) Related settings Select RS-232C, RS-422, or Current Loop by DIP switches S4 and S5 on CONTROL/MODEM board. The pin assignment of the RT connector for MIF data is different from those for IEC data.

When FS-1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set DIP switch as below. - S4-#1 and #2: ON - S4-#3 and #4: OFF

6. REMOTE STATION (Default setting: OFF) Main Ver 2.09 and after This setting determines whether DSC-60 is operated as remote station or not. This item is set at ON or OFF. If it is set at OFF, the remote function can not be switched by [1/RT/2182] key.

DSC60

B4-5

7. NBDP PORT (Default setting: OFF) If FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected to Furuno NBDP, DP-5/6, set this item at ON. Then, the control of the NBDP can be made by the MIF protocol. Whereas MAIN and MODEM CPU programs are updated from IB-581 or PC, NBDP Port setting is disregarded. At this time, however, set DIP switch S3-1 and 2 at ON, S3-3 and 4 at OFF. Note) Related settings Select RS-232C, RS-422, or Current Loop by DIP switches S3 and S5 on CONTROL/MODEM board. The pin assignment of NBDP connector for MIF data is different from those for IEC data.

When DP-6 or DP-5 is connected, set DIP switch as below. - S3-#1 and #2: ON - S3-#3 and #4: OFF

8. CH DET S LEVEL (Default setting: 100) Main Ver 2.09 and after Before transmitting Routine and Business message, the system checks whether the frequency to be transmitted is already in use or not. If it is used, the transmission is commenced after the channel is not used. The maximum scale of the S-meter corresponds to 255. To deactivate this function, select OFF. 9. REGULATION (Default setting: INTL) Main Ver 2.09 and after In Russian version; - Alarm is released continuously after transmitting distress alert. - The [CANCEL] key can be used during the transmission of distress alert. The transmission sequence is stopped at the end of the fifth transmission. - If another distress alert or urgent message is received after pressing the [CALL] key for distress relay or distress acknowledgement, the received message has priority while the function triggered by the [CALL] key is cancelled.

10. DIST Date and time of the latest distress alert are displayed. The data is stored onto the EEROM. Main Ver 2.01: Date and time in ZDA is used. If ZDA is not available, XXXX is shown. Main Ver 2.09: ZDA or RMC is used. If ZDA or RMC are not input, XXXX is shown.

DSC60

B4-6

3. Setting DIP Switches 3.1 Outline of the settings on CONTROL/MODEM board For data communication between the DSC and connected equipment, such as RT, NBDP, DMC and navaids, the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board are setup to select data format. The outline of the settings is shown in the Table and Figures below.

Default settings) - S2-#1 and #2 : OFF - S3-#1 and #2 : ON - S2-#3 and #4 : ON - S3-#3 and #4 : OFF - S4-#1 and #2 : ON - S4-#3 and #4 : OFF - S5, S6, S7, S8 : All OFF

J7

J6

J1

J3 J8 J9

J4

J5

U5U11

S1NMI SW

EEPROM

05P0702

S5

S5

S6

S7

S8S2S3S4

S6S7S8

S6S7S8

(RT) (NBDP) (DMC)

S2S3S4

(RT) (NBDP) (DMC) 1 2 3 4

ON

232

232

CALL

422

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

422

422

1 2 3 4

ON

C.LOOP

DSC60

B4-7

3.2 Setting for the connection with FS-75/1562/5000 and DP-6 TX/RX control data exchange between Furuno radio units is made normally by MIF protocol through the RS-232C connections with factory-default setting.

Connection with FS-5000 and DP-6 Connection with FS-75/1562 and DP-6 The DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board of DSC-60 are set as follows:

RT: S4 (Selection of data format for the communication with RT) - S4-1 and 2 : ON (RS-232C)

- S4-3 and 4 : OFF (RS-232C) NBDP: S3 (Selection of data format for the communication with NBDP) - S3-1 and 2 : ON (RS-232C)

- S3-3 and 4 : OFF (RS-232C) Note) Related settings Pressing [#/SETUP] key reveals “Setup menu” screen. Select SYSTEM, and set RT PORT and NBDP PORT. - RT PORT ->>> MIF - NBDP PORT ->>> ON

Furthermore, priority setting must be made on FS-75/1562:Ver.07 and after. Not necessary on FS-5000.

FS-75/1562 Set to setting No.9928:1

FS-75/1562 Setting of 9928

Priority 0: Main unit takes priority. 1: Remote control takes priority.

1 DSC Distress alert DSC Distress alert 2 2182kHz (Main unit) DSC other than distress 3 DSC other than distress Remote TEL (DSC) 4 Remote TEL (DSC) NBDP 5 NBDP 2182kHz (Main unit) 6 Main unit Main unit

DSC-60

[RT]

[NBDP]

DP-6

FS-5000C

[REM-1/2/3]

[REM-1/2/3][REM-B] [REM-A]

#2-SD#3-RD

#2-SD#3-RD

DSC-60

[RT]

[NBDP]

DP-6

DB-120

FS-75/1562

[REM]

[REM-B] [REM-A]

REM-A PCB#2-SD

#3-RD

#2-SD#3-RD

DSC60

B4-8

3.3 Setting for the connection with navigational aids The input data from navigation aids is selected in format, IEC: RS-422 or Current Loop, using the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board of DSC-60. Set S5-#4 to ON for the reception of IEC data from GPS, such as GP-500M2 and GP-80.

Note) Related settings “AUTO” or “MANUAL” is selectable for POSITION setting in “System setup” menu. If AUTO is selected, the DSC-60 accepts the sentences of GGA, RMC, RMA, GLL, and ZDA. The data that DSC uses are Position data and Time data (automatically combined with transmitting messages). - GGA : Global positioning system fix data - RMC : Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data - RMA : Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data - GLL : Geographic position, latitude/longitude - ZDA : Time and date The ZDA is used for automatically printing-out of sending/receiving messages and the selftest result, and date and time in the communication log.

S5 422

1 2 3 4

ON

C.LOOP

1.NBDP2.RT3.DMC4.NMEA

IEC:RS-422 S5-4: ON

C.Loop S5-4: OFF

DSC60

B4-9

3.4 Setting for the connection with DMC, IC-302 and PC DMC-5, IC-302, and PC can be connected to DMC port. Set the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board as follows: *Default settings: - S5, S6, S7, S8 : All OFF 1. Connecting PC (for use in future) To connect PC, set the DIP switches to RS-232C. - S2-#1 and #2 : ON (RS-232C, TX/RX data) - S2-#3 and #4 : OFF - S5-#3 : OFF - S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF - S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON (PC) - S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF 2. Connecting DMC-5 To connect DMC-5, set the DIP switches to RS-422. - S2-#1 and #2 : OFF - S2-#3 and #4 : ON (RS-422, TX data) - S5-#3 : ON (C.Loop, RX data) - S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON - S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF - S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF 3. Connecting IC-302 To connect IC-302, set the DIP switches to Current Loop. - S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON

- S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF - S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF

Pin assignment of DMC port

J3 pin DMC-5 P/C IC-302 1 TD-A SD DMC-OUT-H 2 TD-B GND DMC-OUT-C 3 RD-A RD DMC-IN-H 4 RD-B GND DMC-IN-C 5 NC NC CTR 6 F.GND F.GND F.GND

DSC60

B4-10

4. Setting the receiver board A FAX-5+2.6m whip active antenna is usually used to receive DSC distress signal and DSC general signal. Set J3 on the RX board to ACTIVE to apply voltage to the antenna.

05P0703:

DSC watch keeping receiver board and

DSC general watch keeping receiver board (option).

J2ANT

J3

ACTIVE455kHz FIL

Ref.OSC

AC

TIV

E

RX

05P0703

DSC60

B4-11

5. How to enter MMSI

This information explains how to release the protector to enter MMSI in System Setup menu. How to enter MMSI To enter MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity number), follow steps below. 1. Turn on the unit, and press S1 (NMI SW) on the CONTROL/MODEM board. The EEROM clear display appears.

2. Type 652111. (ENT key is unnecessary.) The display does not change. 3. Select MMSI CLEAR by pressing an arrow key, and press [ENT]. MMSI default number appears. 4. Enter the MMSI of own ship by using numeric keys. 5. Confirm that the number displayed on the screen is correct. 6. Press [ENT]. The message “PLEASE POWER DOWN” appears. 7. Turn off and on the unit.

DSC-60 with top cover removed

DSC60

B4-12

* DSC-60 daily test *

MAIN CPUMODEMRCVR1RCVR2REMOTE RTREMOTE DP

: :

:: : :

JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26

6. Self test Pressing [3/TEST/DEF] key with DSC standby screen or Radiotelephone setting screen automatically starts the daily test, and the test results are displayed. Main CPU, MODEM, and RX boards can be checked, and the connection between MF/HF radiotelephone and NBDP made by Furuno can be checked by MIF commands. Procedures 1. Press [3/TEST/DEF] key with DSC standby screen or Radiotelephone setting screen. 2. The test automatically starts. The test can not be cancelled once if started.

3. It takes 30 to 40 seconds to complete the test. Then, the distress alarm LED flashes, and the buzzer and external speaker sounds for 2 seconds. 4. The test results are displayed. If a printer is connected, pressing [8/PRINT/TUV] key can print out the results.

Note) The default setting of DAILY TEST in PRINT OUT submenu of “Setup menu” is set at “MANUAL”. Set it at “AUTO” to print out the test results automatically. The printed date and time is the data of NMEA data (ZDA) from the navaids.

To display the present program version number, press the [1 RT] key five times while pressing the [* FILE] key.

5. Pressing [CANCEL] key returns the screen to DSC standby screen.

* DSC-60 DAILY TEST *


: OK VER.xx: OK VER.xx

: OK: OK: OK FS-1562: OK DP-6

MMSI : 123456789JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26

* DSC-60 dialy test *


: OK VER.xx: OK VER.xx

: OK: OK: OK FS-1562: OK DP-6

JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26

DSC60

B4-13

7. Setup menu list

DSC60

B4-14

DSC60

B4-15

DSC60

B4-16

DSC60

B4-17

Main CPU Ver:2.09 and after. Set up Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6

MMSI X1--X9 MF/HF WATCH RCVR

MF LINE OUT LEVEL 0 dBm -12 - +12 dBm

Tx KEY TIMING AUTO 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15 sec

MIF IEC RT PORT OFF ON REMOTE

STATION OFF OFF NBDP PORT ON

CH DET S LEVEL 100 Setting: OFF – 255 INTL

PROTECTION Note) PASS

WORD:xxxxxxx

REGURATION RUSSIAN

System

DIST Date & UTC

DSC60

B4-18


MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone. To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX). 1. Pressing [#/SETUP] key reveals “Setup menu” screen. Select TEST and press [ENT] key. Then, the following “Test function” screen appears.

To execute the test function, cancel “PROTECTION”. Enter “652111” from the numeric keys. 2. Selecting TONE and pressing [ENT] key reveals a submenu. Choose MARK or SPACE on the submenu, and turn the signal “ON” by pressing [ENT] key. For example, choose “MARK”.

3. Transmit power by turn ON the handset PTT switch of DSC-60, and measure the frequency and power. 4. To measure other frequencies, turn OFF the handset PTT switch and change the frequency of MF/HF radiotelephone. Repeat steps 3 and 4. 5. After the completion of the measurements, turn off power for DSC-60.

* * Test function * *

TONE

BK

REMOTE

EXT ALARM

EXT ALERT

AF PCB

CONT PCB

PANEL PCB

RX PCB

TA TEST

PROTECTION : ON

* * Setup menu * *

ALARMAUTO ACKERASE FILEMESSAGEPOSITION

SCAN FREQUSER CHVOLUME

TESTSYSTEMPRINT OUT

[ENT]

* * Test function * *

TONE

BK

REMOTE

EXT ALARM

EXT ALERT

AF PCB

CONT PCB

PANEL PCB

RX PCB

TA TEST

PROTECTION : OFF

SPACE:OFF:OFF:OFFDOT

MARK

MARK:1700Hz – 85Hz SPACE:1700Hz + 85Hz DOT:1700Hz + 85Hz

DSC60

B4-19

9. How to update system program 9.1 Over view The program disk supplied includes two programs: main program and modem program. To update the system program, DIP switch #1 and #2 of S3 on the CONTROL/MODEM board must be set to ON position. Either of an IB-581 or a PC PC/AT compatible is connected as follows. Using IB-581 Using PC Any IB-581 can be used. The PC is connected to the DSC-60 as

below.

Connection between DSC-60 and PC/IB-581 The connection is made with the following interconnection cable. The connector to the DSC-60 is a 25-pin D-SUB male, and to the IB-581 or PC a 9-pin D-SUB female.

DCD

RXD

TXD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTSRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

F.GND

SD

RD

RTS

CTS

DSR

S.GND

DTRTD-A

1234567

NC8

NC19

S.GND9

NC10

2021

TD-B22

RD-A23

RD-B24

NC25

D-SUB 9pin D-SUB 25pin

DSC-60

IB-581

Key

NBDP COM-1

KEY

board

1 2 3 4

ON

S3

(NBDP)

DSC-60

PC

NBDP

1 2 3 4

ON

S3

(NBDP)

RS-232C

DSC60

B4-20

9.2 Updating MAIN program with IB-581 1. Connect the IB-581 to the DSC-60. 2. Turn on the IB-581, but do not turned on the DSC-60. 3. Terminate the terminal program. When using IB-581 for DP-6, FELCOM 12/81, while press and holding down [Alt] and [Fn], press [F2]. For example, A:\DP10\TERMINAL appears on the DP-6 terminal. When using IB-581 for FELCOM 11, press [F1] and [8] in order. 4. Insert the program floppy disk in the slot. 5. Type B: and press [Enter]. The prompt B:\> appears. 6. Type “UPDSC” and press [Enter]. The following message appears. Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.1997,1998,1999 (T.K) uppg infile 1 infile 2 p1 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number.(1,2...) p5:Poer number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:osec Wait:o Wait counter=100 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON. 7. Turn on the DSC-60. The indication on the DSC screen changes as below. The picture on the IB-581 runs. 8. Wait for about 5 minutes. 9. The DOS prompt appears after the message “Finish version up.” 10. Turn off the DSC-60, disconnect the IB-581 and turn on the DSC-60 again. 11. Press [3/TEST/DEF] to perform the selftest and confirm the program has been updated. *** Checking program Version, refer to section “6.Self test”. ***

DSC60

B4-21

9.3 Updating MODEM program with IB-581 1. Connect the IB-581 to the DSC-60. 2. Turn on the IB-581, but do not turned on the DSC-60. 3. Terminate the terminal program. When using IB-581 for DP-6, FELCOM 12/81, while press and holding down [Alt] and [Fn], press [F2]. For example, A:\DP10\TERMINAL appears on the DP-6 terminal. When using IB-581 for FELCOM 11, press [F1] and [8] in order. 4. Insert the program floppy disk in the slot. 5. Type B: and press [Enter]. The prompt B:\> appears. 6. Type “UPMODEM” and press [Enter]. The following message appears. Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.1997,1998,1999 (T.K) uppg infile 1 infile 2 p1 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number.(1,2...) p5:Poer number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:osec Wait:o Wait counter=100 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON. 7. Turn on the DSC-60. The message “Now Loading” appears on the DSC screen. The picture on the IB-581 runs. 8. Wait for about 5 minutes. 9. The DOS prompt appears after the message “Finish version up.” 10. Turn off the DSC-60, disconnect the IB-581 and turn on the DSC-60 again. 11. Press [3/TEST/DEF] to perform the self test and confirm the program has been updated. *** Checking program Version, refer to section “6.Self test”. ***

1. Over view The AA-50 MF/HF DSC Watch Receiver receives distress and safety frequencies (max. 6), and are mainly fitted on the vessels which operate in ocean areas A3 and A4.

Note) SOLAS Chapter-4 Regulation 12 (watch) 1. Every ship, while at sea, shall maintain a continuous watch:

.1 on VHF DSC channel 70, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of regulation 7.1.2, is fitted with a VHF radio installation; .2 on the distress and safety DSC frequency 2,187.5kHz, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of regulation 9.1.2 or 10.1.3, is fitted with an MF radio installation; .3 on the distress and safety DSC frequencies 2,187.5kHz and 8,414.5kHz and also on at least one of the distress and safety DSC frequencies 4,207.5kHz, 6,321kHz, 12,577kHz or 16,804.5kHz, appropriate to the time of day and geographical position of the ship, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of regulation 10.2.2 or 11.1, is fitted with an MF/HF radio installation. This watch may be kept by means of a scanning receiver; .4 for satellite shore to ship distress alerts, if the ship, in accordance with the requirement of regulation 10.1.1, is fitted with an INMARSAT ship earth station.

Section C1. AA-50

DSC-5 orDSC-6

AA-50

FS-xxxx

Receiver

Receiving distress and safety calls

Receiving general calls

Relay turns upward upon receiving distress and safety calls.

Relay

Receiving

Transmitting

C1-1

K2, 3

AA-50

C1-2

2. Connection

Connection

AA-50 Rear Panel

3. Jumper setting

When the Pre-AMP unit (FAX-5) is installed, the jumper block of J9 on the Receiver

Board must be set to “ACTIVE” to supply about 9Vdc to the Pre-AMP unit.

Note) ACTIVE Antenna : 2.6m Whip antenna + FAX-5

Active

J1

To Antenna

2.6m Whip antenna

FAX-5

Factory setting:Active

Receiver Board

MF-HF T/R DSC BREAKER

LINE LEVEL

ANT10.0V-40.0V

0dBm

To DSC Terminal:DSC-5/6To Receiver or Radiotelephon :RV-xxxG/FS-xxxx

Grounding Terminal

2A

The potentionmeter for adjustment of LINE OUTPUT LEVEL (+10dBm adjustable) is on the rear panel.It is pre-adjusted at the factory (0dBm output) for use with the DSC-5/6.

DSC-5 orDSC-6

AA-50 FS-xxxx

DSC MF-HF T/R

ANT

MF/HF Rx REM

2.6m Whip antenna

FAX-5

RS-232C RS-232C

J9

AA-50

C1-3

4. Self test 1. Tune on the power. (Scanning starts.) 2. Press the TEST switch. (“TEST” LED lights.)

*If problem, the “frequency” LEDs light in order. 2187.5 4207.5 6312 16804.5 REMOTE (Note) Lighting Lighting Lighting Lighting Lighting

*If error, Frequency indication LEDs blink. To restart scanning, press any key. (RCVR board or OSC board is suspected to be faulty)

3. The self test stops automatically and scanning restarts.

(“TEST” LED goes off.) Note) The “REMOTE” LED blinks when the AA-50 and DSC-5 (DSC-6) do exchange data.

Cause: DSC turned off, cable between AA-50 and DSC-5 (DSC-6) loosened or Disconnected, or wrong DSC system settings

DSC-5: [Remote-E] setting ---“OFF” and “TERM”, DSC-6: [Type] setting ------ “OFF”.

To restart scanning, press any key.

DP-5

D1-1

1. Connection

Distributor

(05P0606)FS-1562

AA-50 DSC-5/6

DP-5REM

MF/HF TR DSC

MF/HF Rx NBDP

REM-A

REM-B

FS-5000

AA-50 DSC-5/6

DP-5REM 1 or 2 or 3

REM 2 or 3 or 1

MF/HF TR DSC

MF/HF Rx NBDP

REM-A

REM-B

Printer

DP-5

MF/HF DSC

MF/HF RT Key board

Printer

Key board

CONTROL

REM-A(RT)

REM-B(DSC)NBDP

24VDC

NMEA/CIF

Power

GLL, RMA, RMC, VTGDBT, MTW, VHW, TRF

REM

NAV Device

*

*

* When the radiotelephone (DSC) is connected to REM-A port, set to RT (DSC) on F6: terminal menu.* When the DSC (radiotelephone) is connected to REM-B port, set to DSC (RT) on F6: terminal menu.

PP-500PP-510

Section D1. DP-5

DP-5

D1-2

2. Setting list

Function Item Default Setting Note

F3:Operate 6:Manual Reception AUTO AUTO

1:Station Entry Storing To enter appropriate station at least one.

6:Answerback Code Entry MMSI+CS+X Password: ANSWER CODE (Caps Lock)

7:Group ID Entry (4/5 digit)

8:Group ID Entry (9 digit) 9:Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) X1 –X5

F5:Station

0:Select ID Entry (9 digit) MMSI

Password: ID CODE

(Caps Lock)

RX MSG Save OFF OFF Active file Auto Send OFF OFF Signal Tracking OFF ON Edit before sending NO YES or NO ARQ Error count OFF ON Communication time OFF ON Dual font (Bold:Sending) OFF ON Echo ON ON Sending Volume display OFF ON Comm. Status display OFF ON *ARQ/FEC Center Freq 1700 1700 *Shift Freq +85 +85

Pass word:DP5(Caps Lock) Don’t change.

DIRC Center Freq 1700 1700 Shift Freq +85 +85 Rate 60 60 CW Mode Frq 1615 1615 Rate 10 10 Line Out Level (dBm) 0 0 *Remote A Mode OFF RT *Rate (baud) 4800 4800 *Start Bit 1Bit 1Bit *Date Bit 7Bit 7Bit *Stop Bit 2Bit 2Bit *Parity Bit Even Even *Delimiter CR CR

Pass word:DP5(Caps Lock)

Don’t change. Note) RT is connected to REM-A port.

MIF Tune OFF OFF Freeze OFF OFF

F6:Teminal

AGC OFF ON or OFF FS-1562:OFF FS-5000:ON or OFF

*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting.

DP-5

D1-3

Function Item Default Setting Note

*Remote B Mode OFF DSC *Rate (baud) 4800 4800 *Start Bit 1Bit 1Bit *Date Bit 7Bit 7Bit *Stop Bit 2Bit 2Bit *Parity Bit Even Even *Delimiter CR CR MIF Tune OFF OFF

Pass word: DP5(Caps Lock)

Don’t change. Note) DSC is connected to REM-B port.

Freeze OFF OFF AGC OFF OFF

CIF/NMEA Mode CIF CIF or NMEA

F6:Teminal

CIF Rate (baud) 4800 CIF:4800

Pass word: DP5(CAPS LOCK) Jumper setting: JP-2 on the

CONTROL Board. Monitor OFF Line OUT Line In Level 4 4 Line Out Level 4 4 Beep Level 4 4 CRT Economy Mode OFF ON File Partial View OFF ON *Slave Delay 5 msec 5 msec *BK Timing Pre tone 10 msec 10 msec *Post Tone 0 msec 0 msec *Mute Timing Pre BK 0 msec 0 msec

*Post BK 0 msec 0 msec

Pass word: DP5(Caps Lock) Note) Refer to next page. *Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit connected.

Reception Alarm ON ON Time System OFF UTC Time & Date 90/1/1 Setting Printer PP-500 PP-500 PP-500/510 is connected. Header File Name ON ON Time ON ON Footer OFF OFF Language Normal Normal Self Test Version No. Ver x.xx

F8: System

Modem Version No. Ver x.xx


DP-5

D1-4

Reference) Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit connected. Setting of timing list

F6:System Timing (m sec) FS-1562 FS-5000

FS-8000 FS-1503 FS-1502 FS-1552

RC-258 RC-508 RC-808

Slave Delay 5 5 5 50 5 BK Timing Pre tone 10 10 10 50 5 Post Tone 0 0 0 10 0 Mute Timing Pre BK 0 0 0 0 0 Post BK 0 0 0 0 0

DP-5 F6:Terminal MIF AGC OFF ON or OFF OFF OFF OFF

Remarks RT :System settings 9906: 10msec

9982:1 or

(9913:10msec) (9917:BK ON)

9910:10 msec Tx delay time

Default: 30 msec

--

DP-5

D1-5

3. Initial settings 3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry Enter vessel’s answerback code AAB and ID code as follows. “Page D1-13” describes how to change AAB and IDs.

1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu.

2. Press [6] key to select “Answerback code Entry”, or operate the cursor to highlight

item to [6], and press the [Enter] key. The display should look something like below.

3. Enter vessel’s answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks

for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.

Caution

Confirm the “CODE” before pressing ENTER key.

You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.

4. Do the same to enter IDs.

Answerback Code EntryAnswerback Code


432456789 FURU XOK

Cancel

Station

1: Station Entry

2: Timer Operation Entry

3: Scan Entry

5: User Channel Entery

6: Answerback Code Entry

7: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit)

9: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit)0: Select ID Entry (9 digit)

8: Group ID Entry (9 digit)

4: Scramble Code Entery

DP-5

D1-6

3.2 Terminal settings (F6) Press function key [F6] to display the Terminal display. To change settings, first, select “Change” on the top (Set UP) line. Press the [↓ ] key to select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option. “Default” on the setup line is for factory use. “Section 4.2” describes how to change Terminal menu.


Don’t change !!

FS-1562:OFF

Don’t change.

Note) DSC is connected

to REM-B port.

Don’t change.

Note) RT is connected to

REM-A port.

DP-5

D1-7

Terminal menu Description (F6)

DP-5

D1-8

DP-5

D1-9

3.3 System settings (F8) Press function key [F8] to display the System screen. To change settings, first, select “Change” on the top (Set UP) line. Press the [↓ ] key to select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option. “Default” on the setup line is for factory use. “Section 4.2” describes how to change Terminal menu.

*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting

Don’t change. Note) Refer to Setting of timing. (Page D1-4.)

When the PP-500/510 is connected.

DP-5

D1-10

System menu Description (F8) *:protected

DP-5

D1-11

DP-5

D1-12

3.4 Manual Reception (F3-6) Selects communication mode for reception. 1. Press Function key [F3] and then the [6] key. 2. Select receive mode: “AUTO”. (Default)

3. Press the [Enter] key. The reception mode: AUTO appears on the screen.

Note) *AUTO mode : Automatic operation in ARQ and FEC. ARQ mode : ARQ mode only. FEC mode :FEC mode only DIRC mode : DIRC mode only

3.5 NAV data format selection (CIF/NMEA) Jumper wire JP2 on the CONTROL board selects the format of the signal from the navigator connected to the DP-5.

1. Call up the F6: Terminal menu screen that the format selected invalid. Then press DP5 in this order to enable NMEA/CIF mode selection. 2. Press the down arrow key to display the NMEA/CIF mode selection screen. 3. To change the mode, move the cursor from “Look” to “Change” by pressing the right

arrow key. Place the cursor at the NMEA/CIF mode position with the down arrow key, then select a format. Then press the [ENTER] key to return to the normal display.

Manual Reception

AUTO ARQ FEC DIRC

ROMs

JP2

CONTROL board

CIF :ShortNMEA:Open (Factory setting)

Receiving NAV data;

GLL, RMA, RMC,

VTG, DBT, MTW,

VHW, TRF

DP-5

D1-13

4. Changing AAB, ID code, Terminal and System settings 4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code Answerback and ID codes can be changed as follows: 1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu.

2. Press [6] key and [Enter] keys in order. 3. Press the [Caps Lock] key to type in upper case letters. Type [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].

4. Enter vessel’s new answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again. 5. Do the same to changing IDs. For IDs code, type [I] [D] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].


Station

1: Station Entry


3: Scan Entry






4: Scramble Code Entery

DP-5

D1-14

4.2 Changing F6 and F8 settings To change “Locked” items in [F6] and [F8] menus. 1. For example, press function key [F6]: Terminal. 2.Press the [Caps Lock] key to type in upper case letter. Type [D] [P] [5]. 3. To change settings, select “Change” on the top line. Press the [↓ ] key to select item, then press the [→] [←] key to select option.

Note) To select the default setting, select “Default” on the top line, and then press [Enter] key.

DP-5

D1-15

5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM 5.1 S-RAM clear The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the NMI switch on the rear panel as below. Procedure 1. Turn the power on. 2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.

Rear panel view of DP-5

3. After several seconds, the normal display comes on automatically.

When clearing S-RAM, Message and Log file is erased.

REMOTE A REMOTE B

PRINTER CONTROL

CIF/NMEA

NMI SW

DP-5

D1-16

5.2 EEROM Clear 1. Press function key [F8] to open the "System" menu. To change setting, move the

cursor to "Change" on the top line. Press the [↓ ] key to select "Self Test", then press [Enter] key. "Self Test" menu appears on the display.

2. Select "EEROM" on the Self Test menu, then press [Enter] key. 3. EEROM check starts automatically. ( Check Address counts up.) 4. Press [ESC] key while EEROM check is carried out. The message "EE-ROM check completed. Press any key to escape." appears on the display. 5. Press [C] while pressing [Ctrl] key. 6. "Self Test" menu appears on the display. 7. Turn OFF power and ON again. 8. "WRITING to EEROM" appears on the display. 9. Normal display is shown automatically about one minute later. EEROM contents

[F5]: Station menu [F6]: Terminal menu [F7]: Editor menu [F8]: System menu

1. Connection

*MF/HF Radiotelephone :FS-5000, FS-1562 series

*MF/HF DSC :DSC-5/6/60

Note)

Remote A and B ports of Main unit are connected to FS-1562 and DSC-6.

The Distributor board (05P0606) is necessary in the RC-1500 console.

Section D2. DP-6

D2-1

Printer

IB-581

DP-6

Main unit

Terminal unit

*MF/HF DSC

*MF/HF RT

Key board

COM-1COM-2

PrinterPrinter

Key board

Terminal

REM-A(RT)

REM-B(DSC)NBDP

NC

24VDC

24VDC

ICE1162(NMEA)

24VDC

GLL, RMA, RMC, VTGDBT, MTW, VHW, TRF

REM

NAV Device

(PP-510)

Distributor

(05P0606)FS-1562

AA-50

DSC-60

DSC-6

DP-6

(Main unit)

REM

MF/HF TR DSC

MF/HF Rx NBDP

NBDPRT

REM-A

REM-B

or

FS-5000

AA-50

DSC-60

DSC-5/6

DP-6REM 1 or 2 or 3

REM 2 or 3 or 1

MF/HF TR DSC

MF/HF Rx NBDP

NBDPRT

REM-A

REM-B

(Main Unit)

or

DP-6

D2-2

2. Settings list Function Item Default Setting Note

F3:Operate 6:Manual Reception AUTO AUTO

5:Answerback Code Entry

Terminal Ver20 and

after MMSI+CS(4

digit) +X

Password: ANSWER CODE (Caps Lock)

6:Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 7:Group ID Entry (9 digit) 8:Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) X1 –X5

F5:Station

9:Select ID Entry (9 digit) MMSI

Password: ID CODE (Caps Lock)

*Slave Delay 5 msec 5 msec *BK Timing Pre tone 10 msec 10 msec *Post Tone 0 msec 0 msec *Mute Timing Pre BK 0 msec 0 msec *Post BK 0 msec 0 msec *Modem Output Level 0 dBm 0 dBm

Password: DP6 (Caps Lock)

Note) Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit

connected. See to “Reference”. MIF Tune OFF OFF Freeze OFF OFF

AGC OFF ON or OFF FS-1562:OFF, FS-5000:ON or OFF

Emission ON ON TX/RX MSG Save OFF ON or OFF Edit Before sending OFF On or OFF Time System UTC UTC

Time & Date --- ZDA (Terminal Ver 17 and after) Note) When NMEA data is not

connected, entry by manual.

F6:System

Display Mode Normal Normal Language Normal Normal Fn+F1 Printer PP-510 PP-510

Password: DP6 (Caps Lock)

*: Password is needed for change of these setting.

Reference)

Timing values depend on the transceiver connected.

Setting of timing

F6:System Timing (m sec)

FS-1562 FS-5000 FS-8000

FS-1503 FS-1502 FS-1552

RC-258 RC-508 RC-808

Slave Delay 5 5 5 50 5 BK Timing Pre tone 10 10 10 50 5

Post Tone 0 0 0 10 0 Mute Timing Pre BK 0 0 0 0 0

Post BK 0 0 0 0 0 DP-6 F6:System

MIF AGC OFF ON or OFF OFF OFF OFF

Remarks RT :System

settings 9906: 10msec 9982:1

(9913:10msec) (9917:BK ON)

9910:10 msec Tx delay time

Default: 30 msec

--

DP-6

D2-3

3. Initial settings

3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry Enter vessel’s answerback code and ID code as follows. “Section 4” describes how to

change AAB and IDs.


2. Press [6] key to select “Answerback code Entry”, or operate the cursor to highlight

item to [6], and press the [Enter] key. The display should look something like below.

3. Enter vessel’s answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks

for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.

Caution

Confirm the “CODE” before pressing ENTER key.

You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.

4. Do the same to enter IDs.

Station

1: Station Entry


3: Scan Entry








432456789 FURU XOK

Cancel

Terminal program Ver 20 and later, AAB: MMSI(9digits)+4charctor+X

DP-6

D2-4

FS-1500 serise:OFF

3.2 System settings (F6) Press function key [F6] to display the System display.

To change settings, first, select “change” on the top (Setup) line. Press the [↓ ] key to

select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option.

“Default” on the setup line is for factory use.

“Section 4.2” describes how to change System menu.

Enter setting referring to below.

MIF Tune OFF

Freeze OFF

AGC OFF: FS-1562 ON or OFF: FS-5000

Emission ON

Tx/Rx MSG Save ON or OFF

Edit before sending ON or OFF

Don’t change !! *Password is needed for change of these setting. Pass word: DP6 (Caps Lock)

DP-6

D2-5

F6: Menu description

Timing values depend on the transceiver connected. Therefore some trial and

error may be necessary to find suitable values.

*MIF Tune

Turn on to send ATU tuning command.

*Freeze

Turn on to send “freeze” command to radio equipment connected.

*AGC

Turn on to automatically control gain in telex mode.

(FS-1500 series RT is not supports AGC command.)

*Emission

Turn on to automatically change mode at RT to telex.

*Tx/Rx MSG Save

Turn on to automatically save incoming and outgoing message to FDD.

*Edit before sending

“No” transmits keying operation one by one. “Yes” transmits message only

when the [Enter] key is pressed after confirming text typed.

DP-6

D2-6

3.3 Manual Reception (F3-6) Selects communication mode for reception.

1. Press Function key [F3] and then the [6] key.

2. Select receive mode: “AUTO”. (Default)

3. Press the [Enter] key. The reception mode: AUTO appears on the screen.

Note)

*AUTO mode : Automatic operation in ARQ and FEC.

ARQ mode : ARQ mode only.

FEC mode :FEC mode only

DIRC mode : Not use

3.4 Printer and Language setting Press [F1] while pressing [Fn] keys. The “Set up” will appear on the screen.

Default Setting)

Printer: PP-510

Language: Normal

When you change the Printer or Language setting, enter “unlocking” code in upper case

letter: [D] [P] [6].

Manual Reception

AUTO ARQ FEC DIRC

Set up

Language Normal Norway Sweden UK

Printer PP-510 Other

DP-6

D2-7

4. Changing AAB, ID code and System settings

4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code Answerback and ID codes can be changed as follows:


2. Press [6] key and [Enter] keys in order.

3. Press the [Caps Lock] key to type letters.

Type [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].

4. Enter vessel’s new answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel”

asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.

5. Do the same to changing IDs.

For IDs code, type [I] [D] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].

Station

1: Station Entry


3: Scan Entry







DP-6

D2-8

4.2 Changing F6: System settings

To change “Locked” items in [F6] and [F1]+[Fn] menus.

1. For example, press function key [F6]: System.

2.Press the [Caps Lock] key to enter upper case letters.

Type [D] [P] [6].

3. To change settings, Select “Change” on the top line. Press the [↓ ] key to select item,

then press the [→] [←] key to select option.

Note) To select the default setting, select “Default” on the top line, and then press

[Enter] key.

DP-6

D2-9

5. Self Test

To run the self test.

1. Press [F6] to display the system menu.

2. Press [→] to display Change in reverse video.

3. Press [↓ ] to select Self Test.

4. Press the [Enter] key to start the test.

5. Print out printer test.

Test description *Terminal unit test

Displays terminal unit version No.

*Main unit test

Displays MODEM board version no. If NG (No good) appears check

communication cable and if main unit is powered.

*Radio unit test

Transmits CAID command in MIF format to external equipment, and name of

external equipment returns. if NG (No good) appears check communication

cable and if SSB radiotelephone is powered.

*DSC unit test

Transmits CAID command in MIF format to external equipment, and name of

external equipment returns. If NG (No good) appears check communication

cable and if DSC terminal is powered.

*Printer unit test

If NG appears check if printer is powered and if cable between printer and

terminal is connected.

DP-6

D2-10

6. How to Update Programs

6.1 Terminal Program Note) The program floppy disk supplied contains both the terminal and main (main

unit) programs.

1. Quit the terminal program.

With the terminal program version -16 or later,

- press [F2]while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.

With the version -15 or earlier,

- press [F2] while pressing [Fn] key.

The prompt, "A: \>DP10\TERMINAL>", will appear on the screen.

Note) When updating the terminal program of Ver.-11 or prior, delete "DP10.SAV"

file in advance.

1) Quit the terminal program. "A:\>DP10\TERMINAL>" will appear.

2) Confirm the above file, DP10.SAV

- Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively.

3) Files in "A:\>DP10\TERMINAL>" directory will shown.

4) If there is "DP10.SAV" file, delete it as follows.

- Press [D], [E], [L], [Space], [D], [P], [1], [0], [.], [S], [A], [V], and

[Enter] key successively.

2. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive.

3. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys,

- [B], [:], and [Enter], successively.

The prompt, "B:\>", will appear on the screen.

DP-6

D2-11

4. To update the terminal program,

(Terminal Program for Standard)

- press keys, [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L], and [Enter], successively.

Then, the updating will proceed automatically by following the instructions as shown

below:

1) After a message, "Overwrite A:\DP10>----- (Yes/No/All)?", has appeared,

- Then, press keys, [A] and [Enter] , successively.

2) After a message "Press any key to continue." has appeared,

- press any key, for example, [Enter] key.

(Terminal Program for Russian)

- press keys, [R], [U], [S], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter], successively.

Then, the updating will proceed automatically by following the instructions as

shown below:

After a message "Press any key to continue." has appeared,

- press any key, for example, [Enter] key.

Reference)

(1) Press [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for

composing messages between English and Russian.

(2) To install the new program for English version,

- successively press keys, [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L], and [Enter].

The updating automatically proceeds by following instructions to be displayed.

5. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "A:\>".

6. Turn off once and on again the terminal unit.

Confirming program version

To confirm the version of the Terminalv program, execute "[F6]:System ---> Self-Test".

DP-6

D2-12

6.2 Main: Main Unit Program


With the terminal program version -16 or later,

- press [F2] while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.

With the version -15 or earlier,

- press [F2] while pressing [Fn] key.

The prompt, "A:\DP10\TERMINAL>", will appear on the screen.



- [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt, "B:\>", will appear.

4. Turn off once and on again the DP-6 (main unit).

5. To update the main unit program,

- press keys, [N], [B], [D], [P], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] key, successively.

6. After a message "DP-10 File Update" has appeared,

- press [F1] key.

6. - Press [N], [B], [D], [P], [.], [E], [X], [E], and [Enter] keys successively for

"File Name".

If an error message "Timeover Err" appears, turn off and on again the DP-6 main

unit after pressing [Esc] key. Then, try again from step 6.

8. Wait about 5 minutes until the "%" of "File Data Transferring" display reaches 100%.

9. When "Transfer Complete" is displayed, the main unit program updating has finished.

10. Turn off once and on again power of the main and terminal units.


To confirm the version of the main program, execute "[F6]:System ---> Self-Test".

1. Connection

DSC-5

RB-700

FM-7000-E-HK

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

VHF RTMIC

ANT

12VDC

SPKR

EXT SP & Wing Handset

CH70 WR

DSC-5V

RB-700

FM-7000-F

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

VHF RTMIC

ANT

12VDC

SPKR


CH70 ANT

CH70 WR

FM-7000 + DSC-5V (with Channel 70 watch receiver board)

FM-7000 (with Channel 70 watch receiver board) + DSC-5

Section E1. FM-7000

E1-1

FM-7000

E1-2

2. System Settings Preset jumper connections on the PANL board, RX board and SUB-CPU board (option) according to local regulations. You can make USA CH 2/3/4 inoperative.

Note)

2.1

FM-7000

E1-3

FM-7000

E1-4

FM-7000

E1-5

Not use in GMDSS

To default settings

E1-3.

FM-7000

E1-6

FM-7000

E1-7

FM-7000

E1-8

Not use in GMDSS

Not use in GMDSS

E. Registration of steps A to D

Registered

FM-7000

E1-9

JP2 (CH70: refer to page FM7000-11)

2.2

FM-7000

E1-10

2.3

FM-7000

E1-11

2.4

FM-7000

E1-12

3. Adjustment 3.1 Tx Power Adjustment

Item Rating Check Point Adjuster Condition

SIMP 20 to 25 W R54 Simplex CH, Power: HI DUP 18 to 25 W R55 Duplex CH, Power: HI LOW Loss than 1 W R56 CH16, Power: LOW

Hot Power 6 to 8 W

ANT connector

R53 CH16, Power: HI

(Temporarily disconnected lead wire of posistor RT1.)

Note) Hot power; It reduces the power automatically to 6 to 7 w when the temperature at the power amplifiers exceeds 100 degrees (actually 85 degrees)“HI” indication blinks when power is reduced.

3.2 Frequency Adjustment

TX Freq. on CH16 (Rating) Conditions Adjuster 156.8 MHz±300Hz

(Rule: ±10ppm) PTT: ON C68

(TX Board) If the frequency is out of the rating, adjust C68 on TX Board to correct. (Adjust to PLL reference OSC: 8 MHz )

R56 [Low]

R55 [DUP]R54 [SIMP]R53 [Hot]

TX Board

To check "HOT" power,remove RT1 at solder side.

RT1

Power meter

Frequency Counter

ANT

MAIN UNIT

VCO

PA

C68

Pick up

Frequency ADJ. Power ADJ.

FM-7000

E1-13

4. Self Test The built-in self test-diagnosis tests checks the EEROM, Keyboard, PTT switch and auto revert rest for proper operation.

FM-7000

E1-14

Keyboard/Switch Check To check the keyboard, PTT switch, and auto revert rest, press them in succession.

FM-7000

E1-15

FM-7000

E1-16

Error Messages The LCD displays error messages to alert you to possible equipment fault. The table below describes these error messages.

FM-7000

E1-17

5. Private Channel List

FM-7000

E1-18

FM-7000

E1-19

E2-1

1. Connection

The FM-7500 VHF Radiotelephone consists of;

-VHF Radiotelephone FM-7000 -DSC Terminal DSC-5 -Power unit

DSC-5

RB-700

FM-7000

REMOTE 1CIF/NMEA

REMOTE 2

VHF RT

MIC

ANT

12VDC

12VDC

12VDC

SPKR



CH70 WR

AC/DC Power supply

AC100/220V

24VDC

FM-7500

2. Settings Referring to FM-7000 and DSC-5 setting list.

Section E2. FM-7500

1. Connection The FM-8000 enables GMDSS operation with VHF DSC terminal, DSC-8V.

DSC-8V

RB-700

FM-8000

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

VHF RTMIC

ANT

24VDC

SPKR


ANT

T/R antenna CH70 antenna

2. System Settings 2.1 Changing System setting

Section E3. FM-8000

E3-1

FM-8000

E3-2

FM-8000

E3-3

FM-8000

E3-4

FM-8000

E3-5

2.2 Channel Preset (CH0 to CH255 available)

FM-8000

E3-6

FM-8000

E3-7

FM-8000

E3-8

3. Adjustment 3.1 Tx Power Adjustment

Item Rating Check Point Adjuster Condition High Power 20 to 25 W R54 CH16, Power: HI Low Power Loss than 1 W R56 CH16, Power: LOW

Hot Power 6 to 8 W ANT connector

R53 CH16, Power: HI

(Temporarily disconnected lead wire of posistor RT1.)

Note) Hot power; It reduces the power automatically to 6 to 7 w when the temperature at the power amplifiers exceeds 100 degrees (actually 85 degrees) “HI” indication blinks when power is reduced.

R56 [Low]

R54 [High]

R53 [Hot]

TX Board

To check "HOT" power,remove RT1 at solder side.

RT1

Power meter

Frequency Counter

ANT

MAIN UNIT

VCO

PA

C67

Pick up

Frequency ADJ. Power ADJ. 3.2 Frequency Adjustment

TX Freq. on CH16 (Rating) Conditions Adjuster 156.8 MHz±300Hz

(Rule: ±10ppm) PTT: ON C67 (TX Board)

If the frequency is out of the rating, adjust C67 on TX Board to correct. (Adjust to PLL reference OSC: 8 MHz )

FM-8000

E3-9

4. Self test

FM-8000

E3-10

FM-8000

E3-11

Error Indication

E3-3.

E3-3.

FM-8000

E3-12

FM-8000

E3-13

5. Private Channel List

FM-8000

E3-14

FM-8000

E3-15

FM-8500

E4-1

1. Connection

FM-8500 rear view, showing connector location

Note) For RMC, data (month and day) areentered in the log, and for GLL, time(hour/min/sec) is entered in the log.

Section E4. FM-8500

FM-8500

E4-2

TEST VHF ch70manual

System < Rom version >V P ID DSC RT CH PO L

[SELECT] [9]

Select "ID" press the [ENT] key.

Select "CH70" or "VHF" press the [ENT] key.

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key twice.

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key.

Enter own identification[digits] MMSI: - - - - - - - - -

DSC : Receiver < CH70 >CH70 [1] VHF [2]

DSC : remote DMC ONON [1] OFF [2]

RT1-Mode : USA/WX < OFF >ON [1] OFF [2]

RT1-Mode : private < OFF >OFF [1] ON [2]

ON [1] OFF [2]RT2-Hook work : CH16 < ON >

Enter own ship's ID and the [ENT] key twice.

When two FM-8500s are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). The default setting is "CH70" as mainunit.

Select whether DMC-5 is connected or not.(ON:connected)

Disable or enable the USA/WX mode.

Disable or enable the PRIVATE channel mode.


Disable or enable watch on CH16 when handset is on hook.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT2-Hook work : SP < ON >


Disable or enable speaker when handset is on hook.


Disable or enable monitoring of external equipment; For example, Remote Station RB-700 is monitored.

OFF [1] ON [2]

RT3-Time out timer < OFF >

OFF [1] ON [2]

RT4-TX AF monitor < OFF >


ON:Automatic setting of 1W when selecting the low output power channel set by "Channel Preset" operation.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT5-Auto 1W < ON >


Disable or enable dual watch.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT6-Dual watch < ON >

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .Disable or enable channel scanning.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT6-Scanning < ON >

Press the [ENT] key 4 times .

Settings auto SQ function (*better not change these value)LOW:Enter lowest limt of voice frequency which open automatic SQ. Enter value by the following formula. Setting value x 50 = Low FrequencyHIGH:Enter highest frequency which opens automatic SQ. Setting value x 50 = Hi Frequency HOLD:Enter SQ hold time in two digits, by follwing the formula. Setting value x 20 msec= Time desired

LOW= 00 HIGH HOLDRT7-Auto SQ <L00 H03 H030>

ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI >


Disable or continue after a long transmission.For USA, set to ON, Not effective unless USA mode is enabled.

*You had better not change these value.

(*1)

(*1)

(continued next page)

*

2. System settings 2.1 Initial Settings This section provides how to set up the following items. 1. Ship’s ID number 4. Channel system settings 2. DSC block settings 5. Selection of LCD display, Japanese or English 3. VHF block settings 6. Protection (on/off)

Protection OFF Refer to section “2.2Changing system settings”.

Refer to section “5 changing ID and Private mode”.

Refer to section “5.Changing ID andPrivate mode”.

OFF !!

FM-8500

E4-3

Select "SIMP" or "DUP" and press the [ENT] key .


ENABLE=TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]

ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]USA CH:016 < TX SIMP HI >

TELECOM=SIMP[1] DUP[2]INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TELECOM=SIMP[1] DUP[2]USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >

P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]

* The international channel setting display appears.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to a select channel to be set.Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.

TX: Transmission and reception availableRX:Reception onlyUN:Transmission and reception prohibited

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.




Select communication mode.


Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key.


Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.


Select communication mode.Select TX power.

Select "HIGH" or "LOW" and press the [ENT] key .Select TX power.

To set other INTL channels.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.To set other USA channels.

To select other mode (USA, WX or Private), Press the [CH16] key while pressing the a CHNNEL knob.

Press the [CANCEL] key.

*USA Channel mode

PRIV No.SELECT: [<] [>] keyP01/ CH:- - - < - - - - - - - ->

P01/ CH:001 <UNABLE>

Press the arrow key to select private channel (P01 to P20) to be set.Press the [ENT] key.

Select TX power.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.To set other private channels.

*PRIVATE Channel mode

*INTL Channel mode

ENABLE= RX[1] UNABLE[2] WX CH:001 < RX >

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.Press ENABLE[1] or UNABLE[2] key, and [Enter] keydepending on channel.

ENABLE:WX ReceptionUNABLE:WX reception prohibited


To set other WX channels.

*WX Channel mode

(continued on next page)

System < Rom version >

V P ID DSC RT CH PO L

(From previous page)

(RT program Ver-06 and later)

FM-8500

E4-4

Press E[1] or J[2] key, and [Enter] key.

Select "L" and press the [ENT] key .

Select "P" and press the [ENT] key .

Select "ON" and press the [ENT] key .

System < Channel >


System < Channel >


Watch VHF ch70

auto



Protection < OFF >

ON OFF

LCD language < English >E[1] J[2]

For the Tx/RX massage display in DSC and menu display, Japanese or English is selected.

To return to normal display, press [CANCEL] key several times.

* Important !!

Note)PO:TX power adjustment Refer to section "6. 1 Tx Power adjustment".


FM-8500

E4-5

2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display.

To release protection of menu 9, follow the steps below.

Set up menu < M.Position >

1 2 3 4 6 7 9 ALM

Watch VHF ch70

[SELECT]

Set up menu

auto

[SELECT] [9] [ ]

Select "P" and press [ENT] key.

Enter cypher code "652111"

Select "OFF" and press [ENT] key.

Now you can reset the followings.* DSC block* Channel system* Setting language

* RT block * Power setting

After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu shown below to "ON" for normal operation.

Select "ON" and press [ENT] key.Press [CANCEL] key several times.


Watch VHF ch70

Watch VHF ch70

System <Protection >

V P ID ----

System <Own ID number>

V P ID ----

TEST VHF ch70

Protection <OFF>

ON OFF


Protection < ON >

ON OFF


The registered MMSI number and Private mode"ON or OFF" is reading only.If you want to change MMSI number and Private mode "ON or OFF", refer to section "5. Changing ID and Private mode".

auto

manual

auto

Importamt !!

FM-8500

E4-6


[SELECT] “Setup menu” The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item.

Setup menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note

1 Manual Position

L/L and UTC To cancel the manually

entered data, enter 9999 for the UTC.

ABLE ABLE No reason Busy Equip disable Unable channel

2 Auto ack UNABLE

Unable mode

ROM RAM ROM/RAM EEROM NMEA DMC Remote station

Remote loop

Printer IF

Keyboard test Without the [CANCEL] [DIMM] [SELECT] and

[ENT] key. Display test

3 Diagnosis (Protected) 652111

Print out test AUTO

AUTO/MANU MANU

AUTO 4 Print out

EEROM Print out to EEROM content. ON 6 Sound Keyboard

click OFF ON

MASSAGE ADDRESS Group ID 0 MID X5 - X9 7 File TEL No.

FM-8500

E4-7

Setup menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Setting Note

Rom version

RT and DSC version

Protection ON/OFF Pass word:652111 Own-ID number

ID (MMSI) Own ID To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON)

CH70[1] Receiver

VHF[2] Main VHF:CH70 Sub VHF:VHF

When two sets are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF).

ON[1]

DSC: RCVR/DMC

DMC OFF[2]

ON:DMC-5 is connected.

OFF[1] RT1:USA/WX

ON[2] By request

OFF[1] RT1:private ON[2]

By request To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON)

ON[1] RT2:Hook work CH16 OFF[2]

ON

ON[1] RT2:Hool work SP OFF[2]

ON

OFF[1] RT3:Time out ON[2]

OFF

OFF[1] RT4:AF monitor ON[2]

OFF

ON[1] RT5:Auto 1W OFF[2]

ON

ON[1] RT6:Dual watch OFF[2]

ON

ON[1] RT6:Scanning OFF[2]

ON

LOW (00) 00 HIGH (03) 03

RT1-7

RT7:Auto SQ HOLD (30) 30

ENABLE CH (TX /RX/UN) TELECOM

(SIMP/DUP) Channel

INTL, USA,WX,

PRIV TX POWER

(HIGH/LOW)

By request

CH60 CH88 CH CH14

Default:750 Power adjustment required.

CH60 CH88

Tx power

HI/L CH14


English[1]

9 System

LCD Language Japanese[2]

English

Ordinary alarm ON/OFF ON ALM TYPE : 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 1

FM-8500

E4-8

4. Jumper Setting Change the jumper plug setting (JP2) on the CONTROL board according to the type of the wing microphone : Carbon MIC or Dynamic MIC. Handset

- HS-6000FZ6 (Carbon MIC) - HS-6000FZ5 (Dynamic MIC)

MIC Receptacle Box -RBD-VHF (For Carbon MIC) -RBD-VHF-B (For Dynamic MIC)

Top view of CONTROL PCB

For dynamic MIC, set R152 on the CONTROL board at fully counterclockwise (max). No adjustment is required for carbon MIC.

FM-8500

E4-9

5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode (DSC ROM Ver-03 and after)

Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the power turned on.

2. Turn off the power. 3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.

4. Select EEROM with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING

EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power,

5. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.

6. Press [SELECT] key and the [9] key, then this display will appear.

7. Put the cursor on “ID” by pressing [>] key and press [ENT] key.

TEST VHF ch70

manual

Enter own identification

[digits] MMIS: - - - - - - - - Changing ID number.

Clear < Do not clear >NO RAM EEROM ALL

System <Rom Version>

V P ID DSC CH PO L

FM-8500

E4-10

8. Input the ID number of the own ship in nine digits, check to be sure about the input

number, and press [ENT] key. (When a wrong number is input, press [CANCEL] key and enter the correct number.)

9. Put the cursor on “RT” and press [ENT] key twice.

10. After the selection, press [CANCEL] key.

11. Put the cursor on “P”, and press [ENT] key.

12. Select “ON”, and press [ENT] key. (By pressing [ENT] key again, the input ID

number can be confirmed. If the number is incorrect, input the correct number, from the first step.)

13. Return to the normal display by pressing [CANCEL] key several times.

The ID number to be input must be the MMSI number that is allocated to the ship. Again, check that the input number is correct.

Watch VHF ch70

auto

Setting Private mode ON or OFF.

System <DSC:RCVR/DMC>


RT1-Mode:private <OFF>

OFF[1] ON[2]

System < RT 1-7 >


Protection <OFF>

ON OFF

FM-8500

E4-11

6. Adjustment 6.1 TX Power Adjustment Connect Power meter and Dummy load or Antenna as illustrated below.

Must be “Protection OFF”.

*Referring to section : 2.2 Changing System settings (Protection ON/OFF)

1. At the normal display, Press [SELECT] and [9] keys in this order. 2. Select “P” by pressing the [>] keys, then press the [ENT] key. 3. Type password :652111. 4. Select “Protection OFF” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key.

“Protection OFF” 5. Select “PO” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. The following display

appears.

Adjust high power and low power on INTL CH14, CH60 and CH88 as follows. 6. For example to adjust high power on INTL CH60; While pressing the PTT switch, rotate the CHANNEL knob to set high power data. Release the PTT switch when the desired value (power data) appears on the channel display. 7. Then, press [HIGH/LOW] key. The following display appears. Adjust low power by doing the same high power.

8. Change the channel to CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob. Adjust high power and low power by doing the same as CH60. 9. After completion of power adjustment on INTL mode, adjust the output power for PRV mode in the same procedure as for INTL power adjustment. Note that for PRV mode, you can adjust power for each channel.

Tx power - CH60 <HI : 750>

SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw

Tx power - CH60 <LOW : 100>


FM-850050ΩPower meter

Dummy loador Antenna

50Ω50Ω 50Ω

Handset

CH60 :156.325MHzCH14 :156.7MHzCH88 :157.425MHz

High Power :21 - 25WLow Power :0.7 - 1.0W

FM-8500

E4-12

Must be “Protection ON”. *Referring to section “2.2 Changing System settings” (Protection ON/OFF) 10. After completion of power adjustment on all modes, press the [CANCEL] key. 11. Select “P”, then press the [ENT] key. 12. Select “ON”, then press the [ENT] key. “Protection ON” 13. To return to the normal display, press the [CANCEL] key several times. 6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment

Rule:+10 ppm

FM-8500

E4-13

7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.

Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.

4. Clear to RAM, EEROM or ALL.

RAM clear When select to RAM, press the [ENT] key;

Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.

Watch VHF ch70

auto


FM-8500

E4-14

EEROM or ALL clear

Select EEROM or ALL with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power.

Turn the power on again. To set the initial settings. Refer to section “2.1 Initial settings”.

Note) Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the [4] key.


RAM Clears all contents of the S-RAMs. (incl. transmitted and received messages, prepared in messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7], and [1], [2], [4], [6].

EEROM

Clears contents of EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [ALARM]

*Settings of [SELECT] [9] (System setting data) Note) Ship’s ID(“ID”) and Private ON/OFF setting is cleared. Channel preset data (“CH”) and power adjustment data (“Po”) are not restored to default setting when clearing the EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [7] (Message in files)

ALL Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and EEPROM. (There is not clear ID and Private mode settings in [SELECT] [9] menu.)

TEST VHF ch70

manual

FM-8500

E4-15

8. Self test

FM-8500

E4-16

FM-8500

E4-17

PTT ON

TX Power>15W XMT POWER:NG

END OF PTT TEST

TEST ON

TX ON without PA

PLL Lock? PLL Lock:NG

CH70LOOP BACK TEST

OK?

LOOP BACK TESTOK?

AF

LOOP BACK TESTOK?

AF

CH70 RCVR:NG CONTROL:NG

PTT ON TESTOK?

VHF DSC:GOOD VHF DSC:NG

XMT POWER:NG

END

PTT ON TESTOK?

YESYES

YES

YES YES

NO

NO

NO NO

NO

PTT TEST

SELF TEST

FM-8500 Self test flow

In CH70 LOOP-BACK TEST, allother than PA is put in transmissionstatus and DSC signal is transmitted,which is received at CH 70 receiver tosee if it is a right signal by analyzingthe signal with the control. This test allows collective diagnosis ofthe transmitter, CH 70 receiver andcontrol. In AF LOOP-BACK TEST, the testdescribed above is performed onlywith the control by looping the signalback within the control.

H8 CPU has in RAM the diagnosticresult for each PTT ON. For NG, V25 CPU is notified.

FM-8500

E4-18

9. Private Channel list

FM-8500

E4-19

FM-8500

E4-20

FM-8500

E4-21


The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70. The FM-8500 muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2.2 Changing System settings”.

Protection OFF

TEST

TEST


Select "MARK or Space", press PTT SW.



Release PTT SW.

INSPECTION TEST < >

TONE DIS-CH

Tone test < >

CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2


Now doing

Tone test < >




Tx ON(Measurment: power and frequency)


156.525MHz(+10ppm)

1. Connection

Section E5. FM-8700

DX-8700 Rear panel

E5-1

Receivable Sentence)

GLL, RMC, ZDA

*

FM-8700

E5-2

TEST VHF ch70manual

System < Rom version >V P ID DSC RT CH PO L

[SELECT] [9]

Select "ID" press the [ENT] key.

Select "CH70" or "VHF" press the [ENT] key.

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key twice.



Enter own identification[digits] MMSI: - - - - - - - - -

DSC : Receiver < CH70 >CH70 [1] VHF [2]

DSC : remote DMC ONON [1] OFF [2]

RT1-Mode : USA/WX < OFF >ON [1] OFF [2]

RT1-Mode : private < OFF >OFF [1] ON [2]

ON [1] OFF [2]RT2-Hook work : CH16 < ON >

Enter own ship's ID and the [ENT] key twice.

When two FM-8700s are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). The default setting is "CH70" as mainunit.

Select whether DMC-5 is connected or not.(ON:connected)

Disable or enable the USA/WX mode.

Disable or enable the PRIVATE channel mode.


Disable or enable watch on CH16 when handset is on hook.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT2-Hook work : SP < ON >


Disable or enable speaker when handset is on hook.


Disable or enable monitoring of external equipment; For example, Remote Station RB-700 is monitored.

OFF [1] ON [2]

RT3-Time out timer < OFF >

OFF [1] ON [2]

RT4-TX AF monitor < OFF >


ON:Automatic setting of 1W when selecting the low output power channel set by "Channel Preset" operation.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT5-Auto 1W < ON >


Disable or enable dual watch.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT6-Dual watch < ON >

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .Disable or enable channel scanning.

ON [1] OFF [2]RT6-Scanning < ON >

Press the [ENT] key 4 times .

Settings auto SQ function (*better not change these value)LOW:Enter lowest limt of voice frequency which open automatic SQ. Enter value by the following formula. Setting value x 50 = Low FrequencyHIGH:Enter highest frequency which opens automatic SQ. Setting value x 50 = Hi Frequency HOLD:Enter SQ hold time in two digits, by follwing the formula. Setting value x 20 msec= Time desired

LOW= 00 HIGH HOLDRT7-Auto SQ <L00 H03 H030>



Disable or continue after a long transmission.For USA, set to ON, Not effective unless USA mode is enabled.

*You had better not change these value.

(*1)

(*1)

(continued next page)

*

2. System settings

2.1 Initial Settings

This section provides how to set-up the following items.

1. Ship’s ID number 4. Channel system settings

2. DSC block settings 5. Selection of LCD display, Japanese or English

3. VHF block settings 6. Protection (Lock Initial settings)

Protection OFF

Refer to section “2.2Changing system settings”.

OFF!!

Refer to section “5.Chenging ID and Private mode”.

Refer to section “5.Changing ID and Private mode”.

FM-8700

E5-3

Select "SIMP" or "DUP" and press the [ENT] key .

INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI >

ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]

ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]USA CH:016 < TX SIMP HI >

TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >

P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]

* The international channel setting display appears.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to a select channel to be set.Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.













Select communication mode.Select TX power.

Select "HIGH" or "LOW" and press the [ENT] key .Select TX power.

To set other INTL channels.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.To set other USA channels.

To select other mode (USA, WX or Private), Press the [CH16] key while pressing the a CHNNEL knob.

Press the [CANCEL] key.

*USA Channel mode

PRIV No.SELECT: [<] [>] keyP01/ CH:- - - < - - - - - - - ->

P01/ CH:001 <UNABLE>

Press the arrow key to select private channel (P01 to P20) to be set.Press the [ENT] key.

Select TX power.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.To set other private channels.

*PRIVATE Channel mode

*INTL Channel mode

ENABLE= RX[1] UNABLE[2] WX CH:001 < RX >

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.Press ENABLE[1] or UNABLE[2] key, and [Enter] keydepending on channel.

ENABLE:WX ReceptionUNABLE:WX reception prohibited


To set other WX channels.

*WX Channel mode

(continued on next page)

System < ROM version >



ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]

FM-8700

E5-4

Press E[1] or J[2] key, and [Enter] key.

Select "L" and press the [ENT] key .

Select "P" and press the [ENT] key .

Select "ON" and press the [ENT] key .

System < Channel >


System < Channel >


Watch VHF ch70

auto



Protection < OFF >

ON OFF

LCD language < English >E[1] J[2]

For the Tx/RX massage display in DSC and menu display, Japanese or English is selected.

To return to normal display, press [CANCEL] key several times.

* Important !!

Note)PO:TX power adjustment Refer to section "6.1 Tx Power adjustment".


FM-8700

E5-5

2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF)

The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display.

To release protection of menu 9, follow the steps below.

Set up menu < M.Position >

1 2 3 4 6 7 9 ALM

Watch VHF ch70

[SELECT]

Set up menu

auto

[SELECT] [9] [ ]

Select "P" and press [ENT] key.

Enter cypher code "652111"

Select "OFF" and press [ENT] key.

Now you can reset the followings.* DSC block* Channel system* Setting language

* RT block * Power setting

After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu shown below to "ON" for normal operation.

Select "ON" and press [ENT] key.Press [CANCEL] key several times.


Watch VHF ch70

Watch VHF ch70

System <Protection >

V P ID ----

System <Own ID number >

V P ID ----

TEST VHF ch70

Protection <OFF >

ON OFF


Protection < ON >

ON OFF


The registered MMSI number and Private mode"ON or OFF" is reading only.If you want to change MMSI number and Private mode "ON or OFF", refer to section "5. Changing ID and Private mode".

auto

manual

auto

Importamt !!

FM-8700

E5-6


[SELECT] “Setup menu” The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item.

Setup menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note

1 Manual Position L/L and UTC

To cancel the manually entered data, enter 9999 for

the UTC. ABLE ABLE

No reason Busy Equip disable Unable channel

2 Auto ack UNABLE

Unable mode

ROM RAM ROM/RAM EEROM NMEA DMC Rmt station

Remote loop

Printer IF

Keyboard test Without the [CANCEL] [DIMM] [SELECT] and

[ENT] key Display test

3 Diagnosis (Protected) 652111

Print out test AUTO

AUTO/MANU MANU

AUTO 4 Print out

EEROM Print out to EEROM content ON 6 Sound Keyboard

click OFF ON

MASSAGE ADDRESS Group ID 0 MID X5 - X9 7 File TEL No.

FM-8700

E5-7

Setup menu

Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Setting Note

Rom version

RT and DSC version

Protection

Pass word:652111

Own-ID number

ID (MMSI) Own ID To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON)

CH70[1] Receiver

VHF[2] Main VHF:CH70 Sub VHF:VHF

When two sets are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF).

ON[1]

DSC:RCVR/DMC

DMC OFF[2]

ON:DMC-5 is connected

OFF[1] RT1:USA/WX

ON[2] By request

OFF[1] RT1:private ON[2]

By request To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON)

ON[1] RT2:Hook work CH16 OFF[2]

ON

ON[1] RT2:Hool work SP OFF[2]

ON

OFF[1] RT3:Time out ON[2]

OFF

OFF[1] RT4:AF monitor ON[2]

OFF

ON[1] RT5:Auto 1W OFF[2]

ON

ON[1] RT6:Dual watch OFF[2]

ON

ON[1] RT6:Scanning OFF[2]

ON

LOW (06) 06 HIGH (16) 16

RT1-7

RT7:Auto SQ HOLD (30) 30

ENABLE CH (TX /RX/UN) TELECOM

(SIMP/DUP) Channel

INTL, USA,WX,

PRIV TX POWER

(HIGH/LOW)

By request

CH60 CH88

CH (DUP/SIMP)

CH14 Default:750 Power adjustment required.

CH60 CH88

Tx power

HI/L CH14


English[1]

9 System

LCD Language Japanese[2]

English

Ordinary alarm ON/OFF ON ALM TYPE : 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 1

FM-8700

E5-8

4. Jumper settings

Handset -HS-6000FZ6 (Carbon MIC) -HS-6000FZ5 (Dynamic MIC) MIC Receptacle Box -RBD-VHF (For Carbon MIC) -RBD-VHF –B (For Dynamic MIC)

FM-8700

E5-9

5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode

Procedures

1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the power turned on.

2. Turn off the power.


4. Select EEROM with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING

EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the

power” will appear. Then, turn off the power,


6. Press [SELECT] key first and [9] key next, then this display will appear.

7. Put the cursor on “ID” by pressing [>] key and press [ENT] key.

TEST VHF ch70

manual

Enter own identication

[digits] MMIS: - - - - - - - - Changing ID number


System <Rom Version>

V P ID DSC CH PO L

FM-8700

E5-10

8. Input the ID number of the own ship in nine digits, check to be sure about the input

number, and press [ENT] key. (When a wrong number is input, press [CANCEL] key

and enter the correct number.)

9. Put the cursor on “RT” and press [ENT] key twice.

10. After the selection, press [CANCEL] key.

11. Put the cursor on “P”, and press [ENT] key.

12. Select “ON”, and press [ENT] key. (By pressing [ENT] key again, the input ID

number can be confirmed. If the number is incorrect, input the correct number, from

the first step.)

13. Return to the normal display by pressing [CANCEL] key several times.

The ID number to be input must be the MMSI number that is allocated to the ship. Again, check that the input number is correct.

Watch VHF ch70

auto

System <DSC:RCVR/DMC>


RT1-Mode:private <OFF>

OFF[1] ON[2]

System < RT 1-7 >


Protection <OFF>

ON OFF

FM-8700

E5-11

6. Adjustment

6.1 TX Power Adjustment

Connect Power meter and Dummy load or Antenna as illustrated below.

To compensate a power loss in the duplexer, set the maximum power and reduced

power in “DUP” and “SIMP” modes on CH14, CH60, CH88.

Must be “Protection OFF”.


1. At the normal display, press [SELECT] and [9] keys in this order.

2. Select “P” by pressing the [>] keys, then press the [ENT] key.

3. Type password :652111.

4. Select “Protection OFF” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key.

“Protection OFF”

5. Select “PO” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. The following display

appears.

Adjust high power and low power on SIMP (INTL) CH14, CH60 and CH88 as

follows.

6. For example to adjust high power on SIMP (INTL) CH60;

While pressing the PTT switch, rotate the CHANNEL knob to set high power data.

Release the PTT switch when the desired value (power data) appears on the channel

display.

SIMP power - CH60 <HI : 750>


FM-8700 DX-870050ΩPower meter

Dummy loador Antenna

50Ω50Ω 50Ω 50Ω

Handset

CH60 (DUP/SIMP) :156.325MHzCH14 (DUP/SIMP) :156.7MHzCH88 (DUP/SIMP) :157.425MHz

High Power :21 - 25WLow Power :0.7 - 1.0W

TX ANT ANT

FM-8700

E5-12

7. Then, press [HIGH/LOW] key. The following display appears.

Adjust low power by doing the same as high power.

8. Change the channel to SIMP CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob.

Adjust high power and low power by doing the same as CH60.

9. Change the channel to DUP CH60, CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob.

Adjust high power and low power by following the same manner as above.

10. After completion of power adjustment on DUP and SIMP modes, adjust the output

power for PRV mode in the same procedure as that for INTL mode.

Note that in PRV mode, you can adjust power for each channel.

Must be “Protection ON”.


11. After completion of power adjustment on all modes, press the [CANCEL] key.

12. Select “P”, then press the [ENT] key.

13. Select “ON”, then press the [ENT] key.

“Protection ON”

14. To return to the normal display, press the [CANCEL] key several times.

SIMP power - CH60 <LOW : 100>


DUP power - CH60 <HI : 750>


FM-8700

E5-13

6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment

Rule: +10 ppm

FM-8700

E5-14

7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM




Procedures

1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on.

2. Turn off the power.


4. Clear to RAM, EEROM or ALL.

RAM clear

When select to RAM, press the [ENT] key;

Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.

Watch VHF ch70

auto


FM-8700

E5-15

EEROM or ALL clear

Select EEROM or ALL with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A

display

“Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another

display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power.

Turn the power on again.

To set the initial settings. Refer to section “2.1 Initial settings”.

Note)


Contents of S-RAM and EEROM

Item Purpose

RAM Clears all contents of the S-RAMs. (incl. transmitted and received messages, prepared in messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7], and [1], [2], [4], [6].

EEROM

Clears contents of EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [ALARM]

*Settings of [SELECT] [9] (System setting data) Note) Ship’s ID(“ID”) and Private ON/OFF setting is cleared. Channel preset data (“CH”) and power adjustment data (“Po”) are not restored to default setting when clearing the EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [7] (Message in files)

ALL

Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and EEPROM. (There is not clear ID and Private mode settings in [SELECT] [9] menu.)

TEST VHF ch70

manual

FM-8700

E5-16

8. Self test

FM-8700

E5-17

FM-8700

E5-18

FM-8700 Self test flow

PTT ON

TX Power>15W XMT POWER:NG

DUP unit:NG

END OF PTT TEST

TEST ON

TX ON without PA

T/R PLL Lock? RX PLL Lock:NG

TX PLL Lock:NG

CH70LOOP BACK TEST

OK?

LOOP BACK TESTOK?

AF

LOOP BACK TESTOK?

AF

CH70 RCVR:NG

CH70 RCVR:NG memorized

RCVR:NG memorized

RCVR:NG CONTROL:NG

PTT ON TESTOK?

VHF DSC:GOOD VHF DSC:NG

XMT POWER:NG

END

DUP unit OK ?

RCVLOOP BACK TEST

OK?

PTT ON TESTOK?

YESYES

YES

YES

YES YES

NO

NO

NO NO

NO

PTT TEST

SELF TEST

H8 CPU has in RAM the diagnostic

result for each PTT ON.

For NG, V25 CPU is notified.

In CH70 LOOP-BACK TEST and RCV

LOOP-BACK TEST, all other than PA is put in

transmission status and DSC signal is transmitted,

which is received at CH 70 receiver and RX board

to see if it is a right signal by analyzing the signal

with the control. This test allows collective

diagnosis of the transmitter, CH 70, RX receiver

and control. In AF LOOP-BACK TEST, the test described

above is performed only with the control by

looping the signal back within the control.

FM-8700

E5-19

9. Private Channel list

FM-8700

E5-20

FM-8700

E5-21

FM-8700

E5-22

10. Power and Frequency measurement of

VHF Radiotelephone



The FM-8700 muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2.2 Changing System

settings”.

Protection OFF

TEST

TEST


Select "MARK or Space", press PTT SW.



Release PTT SW.

INSPECTION TEST < >

TONE DIS-CH

Tone test < >



Now doing

Tone test < >




Tx ON(Measurment: power and frequency)


156.525MHz(+10ppm)

1. Connection

2. System settings Each port must be set up through the menu. Selecting equipment as follows. 1. Press [SETUP] key. 2. Press [1]:NAVTEX, [2]:2182WR, [4]:VHF DSC, [5]:MF/HF DSC or [6]:SES/EGC key

within 2-3 seconds. 3. Select each of content on setup menu by [SELCT] key. 4. Press [ENT] key. Other setup

*Alarm tone selection : [SETUP], [7] *Enter Date & time : [SELECT], “TIME”

Section F1. DMC-5

F1-1

TB-1 TB-2

TB-7 TB-8 TB-9

TB-10

TB-3TB-4

TB-5TB-6

MF/HF DSCSystem

NAVTEXEGC RECV 2182 kHz WR

NO.1 VHF+DSC System

NO.2 VHF+DSC System

INMARSAT-C(Class 2)

10-40V DC

Tx/

RX

dat

a

Tx/

RX

dat

a

Tx/

RX

dat

a

AF

AF

ALA

RM

ALA

RM

ALA

RM

DM

C

(RS

-410

N)

(RS

-410

N)

(RS

-410

N)

(C.L

oop)

(C.L

oop)

(C.L

oop)

DMC-5

EGC-5 AA-45B/46B NX-500

AL-5/5F AL-5/5F

MF/HF RT (FS-5000/1562/etc)WR (AA-50)DSC (DSC-5/6/60)

FM-8500FM-8700FM-7500FM-7000+DSC-5/5VFM-8000+DSC-8VP FELCOM-10/11/12

DMC-5

F1-2

System Settings List The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item.

Menu Setting Note OFF NAVTEX

Receiver [SETUP]

[1] ON ON or OFF When installed in NAV bridge, setting may OFF.

OFF ON 2182kHz WR [SETUP]

[2] Monitor-OFF OFF 2182kHz Watch keeping is not

required from Feb. 1999.

OFF No.1 VHF DSC [SETUP]

[4] No.2 No.1 When VHF No.1out of order,

select VHF No.2.

OFF J3E H3E MF/HF DSC [SETUP]

[5] F1B

J3E Select class of emission for distress communications.

OFF EGC

SES+EGC SES/EGC [SETUP] [6]

SES(EGC)

SES(EGC) FELCOM-10/11/12 connected.

Type 0 to 9 (Default:1)

The user may select receiver alarm tone. Alarm Tone

Selection [SETUP]

[7] Key click ON or OFF

Date & Time [SELECT] ”TIME”

YY-MM-DD-UTC

YY-MM-DD-UTC

The UTC time used for Distress alert message.

Note) The UTC time when it was entered with the DMC-5 is given priority more than the DSC-5/6/8VP and FM-8500/8700.

Condition of the UTC time setting from DMC-5 to DSC-5/6/8VP, following below.

*When the DMC-5 entered the UTC time *When the DMC-5 counted 00:00. *When the DMC-5 or DSC-5 turn on power. *When the DMC-5 changed in NO.1 or No.2 VHF selection setup menu. *When the DMC-5 set from OFF to ON in the MF/HF setup menu.

DMC-5

F1-3

3. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs

Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on. 3. The screen should look something like this: 4. Select RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM by pressing the [SELECT] key.

RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key; The power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually.

Clear <Do not clear> NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM

DMC-5

F1-4

EEROM clear

When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key; After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually. Muse be system settings. (Refer to section “2. System settings”)



RAM 2 Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. received messages and ship’s position data.)

EEROM Clears all contents of the S-RAM and EEROM. (Settings of combined equipment, etc. [SETUP] [1] and [7]

DMC-5

F1-5

4. Self test

1. Connection

2. System settings 2.1 System setup: [F5] 1. Press [F5] to display the System menu. 2. Press [Enter] or [1] to display the System setup screen.

3. Necessary settings are as below. (DET installed only one)

*System Date YY-MM-DD *Preferred NCS AUTO *SES Operation Mode INMARSAT-C

Section G1. FELCOM 10

G1-1

FURUNO

24VDC

24VDC

AC

ANT

DMC

DTE2

DTE1

NMEA/CIFNMEA/CIF CONTROL

IC300 DMC-5

IC-100

IC-200

IC-301Printer

PP-500

Printer

KeyKey board

EGC Printer (PP-505) or 2nd Terminal

REMOTE B

REMOTE A

IC-500

GLL, RMA, RMB, RMC, VTG, WPL

Distress Alaert Unit

Receiver Call Unit

RP

NMEA)

or

NC

NC NC

FELCOM 10

G1-2

*Nav port Auto *DTE 2 Port Sub -addr. 001 *Message Output Port DTE1 *Polling Output Port DTE1

2.2 Terminal setup: [F6] 1.Press [F6] to display the Terminal menu.

2. Set the “DET Type” to Main. 2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10] 1. Press [F10] key, and [2] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings are as below.

*Set the CES ID The default CES ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS). Tap the Space Bar to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable CES by the [↓ ] key followed by the [Enter] key.

*Protocol Select “Maritime”. *Nature Set to “Unspecified”.

FELCOM 10

G1-3

3. Jumper wire setting (CPU Board ROM: U1 Ver 1650041102B and after) 3. 1 EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting

FELCOM 10

G1-4

3.2 For Data Format (NMEA/CIF) JP 1 setting

NMEA : Put a jumper to NMEA side (GLL, RMA, RMB, RMC, VTG, WPL)

CIF : Put a jumper to CIF side

CPU Board

Note) U1 (EPROM): Program and Return/Forward ID Installed.

CPU Board 16P0043-2: ROM(U1) 1MB 16P0043-3: ROM(U1) 4MB

EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting jumper.

FELCOM 10

G1-5

4. System status monitor Press [F8], [1] key to display the System Status Monitor.

System Status Monitor Display

FELCOM 10

G1-6

FELCOM 10

G1-7

5. S-RAM Clear The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the NMI switch on the rear panel as below. Procedure 1. Turn the power on. 2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.

Rear panel view of IC-500


REMOTE A REMOTE B

PRINTER CONTROL

CIF/NMEA

NMI SW

FELCOM 10

G1-8

6. Menu Tree

FELCOM 10

G1-9

7. FURUNO Information

FQ5-93-025 1993-07

1. Connection

2. System settings

2.1 System setup: [F5] 1. Press [F5] to display the System menu.

2. Press [Enter] or [1] to display the System setup screen.

3. Necessary settings are as below. (DTE installed only one)

*System Date YY-MM-DD

*Preferred NCS AUTO

*MES Operation INMARSAT-C

*Nav port INT or EXT (Depend on installation)

INT: Internal GPS Board

EXT: External Equipment


G2-1

FURUNO

BUZZER

24VDC

ANT

DATA

DMC

DTE2

DTE1

NMEA

IC300 IC300 DMC-5

IC-111

IC-211IB-581

IC-301

Printer

PP-510

COM1

COM2

Printer

KeyKey boaerd


24VDC

24VDC

5D-FB-CV (30 m)8D-FB-CV (50 m)12D-SFA-CV (100 m)

REMOTE A

REMOTE B

CONTROL

CIF/NMEA

24VDCPrinter

PP-510

Printer

KeyKey boaerd

IC-511

GLL, RMA, RMBRMC, VTG, WPL

GPS Rx board

Option

orDistress Alert Unit

Receiver Call Unit

or

NC

NC

NC

NC

Note) CPU2 Ver 105 and after ; Additional BWC and BWR.

FELCOM 11

G2-2

*DTE 2 Port Sub -addr. 001

*Message Output Port DTE1

*Polling Output Port DTE1

2.2 Terminal: [F6]

1.Press [F6] to display the Terminal menu.

Terminal: IB-581 Terminal: IC-511

2. Set the “DET Type” to Main.

2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]

Press [F10] key, and [1] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings

are as below.

* LES ID

The default LED ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS). Tap

the Space Bar to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable LES by the [↓ ] key

followed by the [Enter] key.

*Protocol

Set to “Maritime”.

*Nature

Set to “Unspecified”.

FELCOM 11

G2-3

3. Dip switch setting

1. Remote Alarm setting

The FELCOM 11 can be connected to remote units Distress Message Button IC-300 or

Distress Message Controller DMC-5. Which generates an audible alarm when a distress

alert or urgent message receives. The DIP switch (S2) on the CPU Board function as

below. All bits are set to OFF at factory.

Pin # Type of Alarm OFF ON 3 Distress Enabled Disabled (*1)(*2) 4 Urgent Enabled Disabled (*1)

*1) To change the setting, captain’s agreement is required.

*2) This setting is allowed only when EGC alarm generated from the Terminal Unit can

be heard at the conning place.

CPU Board (16P0108)

CPU

S2

CPU

1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

S2

Distress

Urgent

FELCOM 11

G2-4

4. System status monitor

Terminal: IB-581 The system Status Monitor is always displayed.

Ternimal: IC-511 Press [F8], [1] or [Enter] key to display the System Status

Monitor.

System Status Monitor Display

FELCOM 11

G2-5

FELCOM 11

G2-6


FQ5-96-003

1996-02

FELCOM 11

G2-7

FQ5-95-012

1995-07

FELCOM 11

G2-8

6. MES ID

The MES ID number is burnt in EEROM U21 on the CPU Board in the Communication

Unit. If the CPU Board must be replaced, be sure to restore the original EEROM.

Otherwise, you cannot pass or receive traffic.

7. S-RAM Clear (IC-511)

The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three

ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the

NMI switch on the rear panel as below.

Procedure


2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.

Rear panel view of IC-511


REMOTE A REMOTE B

PRINTER CONTROL

CIF/NMEA

NMI SW

FELCOM 11

G2-9

8. Menu Tree

FELCOM 11

G2-10

9. How to up date the Terminal (IB-581) program


- Press keys, [F1] and [8], successively.

or,

- select "[8]: Quit" in [F1]: File menu, and press [Enter] key.

2. The prompt, "A:\FELCOM11>", will appear on the screen.






- press [I], [B], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] keys, successively.

Reference) When installing terminal program for Russian;

(1) Successively press keys,

- [I], [B], [R], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter].

(2) Pressing [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for


6. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "B:\>".


Confirming the program version;

The version of the terminal program appears on the screen when starting terminal

program.

1. Connection

2. System settings

2.1 System: [F8] 1. Press [F8] to display the System menu.

2. Press [2] to display the System setup screen.


G3-1

FURUNO

BUZZER

24VDC

ANT

DATA

DTE2

DTE1

NMEA

IC302

IC302DMC-5

IC-112

IC-212IB-581

IC-303

Printer

PP-510

COM1

COM2

Printer

KeyKey boaerd


24VDC

5D-FB-CV (30 m)8D-FB-CV (50 m)12D-SFA-CV (100 m)

GLL, RMA, RMBRMC, VTG, WPL

GPS Rx board

Option

Distress Alert Unit

Receiver Call Unit

or

orNC

Note) CPU2 Ver 106 and after ; Additional BWC and BWR.

DMC1

DMC2

FELCOM 12

G3-2

3. Necessary settings are as below. (DTE installed only one)

*System Date & Time YY-MM-DD

*Preferred NCS AUTO

*MES Operation Mode INMARSAT-C

*Nav port INT or EXT (Depend on installation)

INT: Internal GPS Board

EXT: External Equipment *Active port DTE 1

*Message Output Port DTE1

*EGC Output Port DTE1

2.2 Updating a Distress Alert: [F8]

Press [F8] key, and [1] key. The display should look like below.

Necessary settings are as below

* LES ID

The default LED ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS).

Press the [Enter] key to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable LES by the

[↓ ] key followed by the [Enter] key.

*Protocol

Set to “Maritime”.

*Nature

Set to “Unspecified”.

FELCOM 12

G3-3

3. Dip switch setting

Terminal software:1650116103 and before CPU 2:1650118104 and before

All bits of the DIP switch S1 on the CPU board must be set to “OFF” position.

If the switch is set to “ON” position, the received call unit IC-303 and/or the distress

message controller DMC-5 cannot release alarm signal when a distress and an urgency

(including EGC) message are received. Note that the distress alert unit IC-302 dose not

release alarm sound when a distress and an urgency message are received.

DIP SW No. Alarm type OFF ON Remark

1 Always OFF Factory use 2 Always OFF Not used 3 Distress Output Not output 4 Urgency Output Not output

Terminal software:1650116104 and after CPU 2:1650118106 and after

Compliance with IMO Circ.862 (Referring to Furuno Information FQ5-1999-015)

The buzzer on the Distress/Urgent receiving unit IC-303 does not sound at the reception

of the telex routine message. The alarm sound is released when the DIP switch, S1 #3

on the CPU board is turned on.

DIP SW No. OFF ON

1 Always OFF 2 Always OFF

3 The IC-303 sounds at the reception of the telex routine message.

4 The IC-303 unit does not sound at the reception of the EGC urgency message.

CPU board

FELCOM 12

G3-4

4. System status monitor

FELCOM 12

G3-5

FELCOM 12

G3-6

5. MES ID

MES ID, Forward ID and Return ID is factory programmed. When replacing the CPU

Board (16P0148), remove the EEROM from the old board and put it on the new board.

FELCOM 12

G3-7

6. Menu Tree

FELCOM 12

G3-8

7. How to update the Terminal and CPU-2 program

7.1 Terminal 1. Quit the terminal program.

- Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.

2. After a message "OK to quit system? Yes/No" has appeared,

- place the cursor on "Yes" and press [Enter] key.

A prompt "A:\FELCOM12>" will appear.






- press [I], [B], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] keys, successively.

Reference) When installing terminal program for Russian:

(1) Successively press keys,

- [I], [B], [R], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter].

(2) Pressing [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for





With terminal prgram versin -03 after or later :

To confirm the version of the terminal program,

- press [F1] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.

FELCOM 12

G3-9

7.2 CPU-2

The program for CPU-2 on the CPU board in the communication control unit is stored

in U26 (Flash ROM), and its updating is executed from the terminal unit. Updating the

program is made as follows;

Note) U26 stores the loader program and CPU-2 program. For the program updating,

the loader program loads the CPU-2 program .



2. After a message "OK to Quit System Yes/No ?" has appeared,


Then, the prompt "A:\FELCOM12>" will appear.

3. Insert the floppy disk containing the program for CPU-2 into the FD drive.

4. Change to "B" drive by successively pressing keys,

- [B], [:], and [Enter].

Then, the prompt "B:\>" will appear.

5. Successively pressing keys,

- [U], [P], [F], [1], [2], and [Enter], will show the following message:

"About to update FELCOM12 CPU2 software. Press 'Y' to update the software to

165-0118-lxx. If you wish to cancel, Press 'N' key."

6. - Pressing [Y] key will show the following message:

"Loader Version 6.00 Erase wait: 0 sec Write wait: 0 Wait counter=100

TARGET power ON"

7. - Turning off once and on again the communication control unit will show the

following message:

"Execute STEP 1 Execute STEP 2 xxxxxx byte transfer Now Erasing xxx

percent completed"

Note) xxx will count from 000 to 100.

FELCOM 12

G3-10

8. When xxx has counted up to 100 (about 5 minuts later) the following message will

appear and the updating will be finished;

"Finish version update."

"B:\>"

9. Turn off once and on again the communication control unit and terminal unit.

H1-1

1. Connection

FELCOM 80

FELCOM 80 + HSD (IB680)

Note) Refer to FURUNO Information, FQ 5-1999-014. To connect the HSD modem, Inmarsat communication unit must be modified as below. Modification kit comes with the HSD modem, IB-680.

1. Replacement of rear panel 2. Replacement of ROM on SYS CPU and I/O CPU board

(SYS: Ver19 or more I/O:Ver.3 or more) 3. Fixing of the connector plate onto the rear panel and wirings 4. Replacement of FILTER board in DOWN CONV unit

Section H1. FELCOM 80

REF

RX

TX

ANT CONT

ANT AC

GYRO

AC IN

NMEA

DTE1

AC OUT

PRINTER

TEL1

DTE2

PC DATA

JUNCTION BOX

FAX

Terminal(PC)

Printer(PP-510)

Terminal(PC)

No. 1 TEL

FAX

IB-311

IB-310

To connect two or more telephones, use junction box IB-311.Cllass

Class 2 only

B-FAXTB4

UP CON

DOWN CON

IB-180

IB-280

For FAX, PC

REF

CTRLCTRL

RX IF

TX IF

REF

RX

TX

ANT CONT

ANT AC

GYRO

AC IN

NMEA

DTE1

AC OUT

PRINTER

TEL1

DTE2

PC DATA

JUNCTION BOX

FAX

Terminal(PC)

HSD Terminal(PC)

Printer(PP-510)

Terminal(PC)

No. 1 TEL

FAX

IB-311

IB-310

To connect two or more telephones, use junction box IB-311.Cllass

Class 2 only

B-FAXTB4

UP CON

DOWN CON

IB-180

IB-680

IB-280

For FAX, PC

HSD Terminal(RS-422 or 232C)

FELCOM 80

H1-2

Multiple Telephone/Facsimiles Install the PHONE I/F board (standard supply) in the Communication Unit and connect it to the V. CODEC board as shown below.

Connection of more than one telephone requires Junction Box IB-311. In this case the TEL1 and FAX1 modular jack on the Communication Unit IB-280 is not used.

IB-311 Junction Box

IB-280

Max. TEL 4 ,

FAX 2 units

FELCOM 80

H1-3


Settings item

Unit Function Setting Note

IB-180 AZ CPU

Board: DIP SW S2

Antenna hatch direction

Depend on the Antenna installation. Ship’s Stem (Std.Setting): S2-All OFF

AD Converter

Board Setting of Gyro Depend on the Gyro

specifications. Default: AC synchro/360X/100VAC

IB-280

Tx/Rx IF board:S1/S2

The output level of Tx/Rx IF

board.

Depend on the Antenna cable

length.

Cable length 25m or less:S1/S2 H(L)/L(H) 26m or more:S1/S2 H/H—Default

TEL FC622SL1WG Dialing format PB [STO] [#] [*] [STO]

Printer PP-510 Left Margin DIP SW-ALL OFF PP-510 ROM Ver: 1650098100 System program Ver: 1650084010

Dialing format PB Modem speed: 9600(B-FAX) 9600bps

Modem speed:2400

2400bps

Monitor ON or OFF Language Japanese or English

FAX *PFX-50

ECM OFF

Refer to section “3.6 FAX settings:PFX-50”.

AAB IMN + 4Char. + X (4Char.:Ship’s name)

[F4][3][7] Reentering AAB: Press [Alt]+[Ctrl],

type “ANSWER”

Entering IMN & ID

Assigned IMN & ID

CPU2 DIP SW S2#2 ON or

Displaying the commissioning menu by commands **Job number & Pass word** - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE - Password : FELCOM80

DMG message: Ship’s name

4Char.:Ship’s name

[F4][6][3] 1:Abbr.ship’s Name 2: Maritime 3:Undesignated

Ter- minal Unit

PC

Network Setup Select sea area [F4][6][4]

*PFX-50

All Memory Clear

When the FAX is turned off for a long period, it dose not function properly, became of

abnormality of the FAX’s memory (RAM) contents.

1. Turn the power off.

2. While pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*] keys together, turn the power on.

3. Preset various settings.

FELCOM 80

H1-4

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. Setting item


OFF: Direct call

No.1 TEL: - Register the TEL number: *51* LES 00 Country code xxxxxxx # - Clear the registered number: *51*#

SW Panel SW1 Automatic call

ON: Address call Call start with reception of DTR signal from HSD terminal.

OFF: RS-449 SW Panel

SW2 Terminal Interface

ON: RS-232C

Interface with HSD terminal. RS-449:D-SUB 37pin

RS-232C: D-SUB 25pin Never use both RS-232C and RS-449 terminal on the HSD modem at the time.

OFF: NO SW Panel SW3

Automatic data rate switching ON: YES

OFF: HDCL SW Panel SW4

Command format ON: BSC

- High level data link control - Binary synchronous communication

OFF: 8 bit/no parity SW Panel SW5

Character format ON: 7 bit/odd parity

64k

IB-680

Date rate SW Data rate 56k 56k is for USA ISDN circuit

Reference: IB-680) Registering, Deleting Subscriber Number Register subscriber number as follows with the No.1 telephone. The subscriber number may contain 20 digits (*,# cannot be registered). The number can be confirmed by printing the status display. 1. Pick up the handset of the No.1 telephone and confirm dial tone. 2. Dial subscriber’s No. as follows;

*51* aaa 00 bb xxxxxxxxx # subscriber number Country code Automatic Dialing Land Earth Station (LES)

Prefix for HSD call

Deleting subscriber number Dial [*] [5] [1] [*] [#].

FELCOM 80

H1-5

3. Setting procedure 3.1 DIP switch setting (Antenna unit: IB-180)

FELCOM 80

H1-6

3.2 Tx IF output level setting (Communication unit: IB-280)

FELCOM 80

H1-7

3.3 Gyro Converter setting (Communication unit: IB-280)

FELCOM 80

H1-8

FELCOM 80

H1-9

FELCOM 80

H1-10

FELCOM 80

H1-11

Function of DIP switches and Jumper wires The function of each DIP switch and jumper wire is as shown in the tables which follow.

FELCOM 80

H1-12

FELCOM 80

H1-13

Modification when using DC Step Type Gyrocompass If DC step type gyrocompass is used, modification of the communication unit is required to prevent the fuse of the gyrocompass from being blown. Modification in the field Disconnect the plug mated to J3 on the LED PANEL board (16P0087) at the back side of the front panel of the communication unit. And change the setting of the slid switch S1 on the LED PANEL board.

FELCOM 80

H1-14

FELCOM 80

H1-15

DIP switch and Jumper wire settings by makes and models of gyrocompass The table below shows how to set the AD Converter board for connection with various makes and models of gyrocompasses.

FELCOM 80

H1-16

3.4 Setting of Telephone Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. The handset should be on the hanger.

1. Press the [STO] key 2. Press the [#] key. 3. Press the [*] key to display “Pb”. 4. Press the [STO] key again.

3.5 Printer: PP-510 Setting (Ver 1650098100) For Left Margin Field modification 1. Replace ROM in PP-510 (Type: 1650098100) and change the DIP switch setting. 2. Update master system FD to version 10 (Type: 1650084010) and make execution FD. Replacing ROM and changing DIP switch setting 1. Remove the printer cover and the ribbon cassette. 2. Slide the print head to far right-hand side.

3. Slide the DIP switch cover leftward to remove it. 4. Replace ROM. 5. Set the DIP switch #1 - #8 to OFF. 6. Line up the left-hand end of the DIP switch cover with point @ and then slide it

rightward to set. 7. Set the ribbon cassette and refasten the printer cover. Note) Ver 1650098100 before

Set the DIP switch #4 and #5 to ON.

FELCOM 80

H1-17

3.6 FAX settings: PFX-50 1. Clearing contents of RAM To clear all contents of RAM, turn the power on while pressing and holding down the [1] [3] and [*] keys together. 2. How to set up FAX The setting changes to the factory default if the machine is not used for about one month or more. Follow the steps below to set up the fax. 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*]. 2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 3. Enter ship’s name by referring character code list in the operator’s manual. 4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 5. Enter the fax number of own station. 6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 7. Press [FUNCTION/NO] to change line type from DP to PB. 8. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 9902101230 for 12:30, February 1999. 10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. After 2 seconds, “TEL/FAX” appears. 11. Press [FUNCTION/NO] three times. 12. Press [YES], [NO], and then [NO]. 13. Press [YES], and then [NO] four times. 14. Press [YES]. 15. Press [YES]. 16. Change receiving mode to FAX by pressing [AUTO RCV/YES] several times.

FELCOM 80

H1-18

3. How to turn off ECM

Depending on the fax model of the receiving station, necessary is turning off ECM

(Error Correction Mode) of the fax PFX-50. The procedure is;

1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3].

2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]

and [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order.

Now the screen should show “FUNC0=00010010”

Note)

Press 00010000 in that order to change modem speed from 9600 bps to

2400 bps, 10: 9600bps, 00: 2400bps.

FUNC 0=0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears.

4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM.

The third digit from right is for ECM on and off.

Note) FUNC 18=0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order.

6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.

ECM ON/OFF

0:OFF 1:ON Line MON ON/OFF

0:OFF 1:ON

Modem speed

00: 2400bps 10: 9600bps

FELCOM 80

H1-19

Reference)

FELCOM 80

H1-20

Setting Modem Speed, Turning Line Monitor ON/OFF

Changing dialing format Change dialing format “Pulse” to “Pushbutton”. See page H1-19.

B-FAX: 9600bps

FELCOM 80

H1-21

Changing language from Japanese to English

FELCOM 80

H1-22

3.7 Terminal settings 1. Entering AAB Press [F4], [3] and [7] in this order at normal display. Enter your ship’s answer back code given by Inmarsat, then press the [Enter] key. Normally, answer back code consists of telex IMN given by Inmarsat and four characters your applied to Inmarast for.

EX) TELX IMN No. 4characters X 343164830 JFKS X Reentering AAB 1. Press [F4], [3] and [7] in this order at normal display. 2. While pressing and holding down both the [Alt] and [Ctrl] keys, enter cipher code;

[A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] The AAB stored in the memory is erased.

! !! ATTENTION: CAN NOT

FELCOM 80

H1-23

2. Entering IMN 1. Turn the Communication Unit off and turn on pin#2 of DIP switch S2.

2. Turn the Communication Unit on. 3. On the Terminal Unit (PC), press [Esc] to display the normal display and then press

[F4] and [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu. 4. Press [6] and [Enter] key to display the Commissioning menu. 5. Press [6] followed by the [Enter] key. The following display appears.

6. Enter appropriate number followed by the [Enter] key.

7. Press [Back Space] to clear data and enter terminal ID number given by Inmarsat. 8. Press [>] and enter INM followed by the [Enter] key. 9. To enter other INMs, repeat steps 6 to 8. 10. Press [E] and [Enter] to return to the Commissioning menu. Note) The OID/DID number assigned from Inmarsat are;

Voice : 01 –0F TELEX : 31 – 3F FAX : 11 – 1F HSD 56k: 42 * DATA : 21 – 2F HDS 64k: 41 *

OR Displaying the commissioning menu by commands [F4][6] **Job number & Pass word** - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE - Password : FELCOM81

*: In rare cases, 56k HSD: 41 and 64k HSD: 42; 56k HSD: 41 and 64k HSD: 51.

FELCOM 80

H1-24

3. Setting up DMG message (Class 1 only)

4. Setting up Network menu

FELCOM 80

H1-25

4. Self Test 1. By PC

Note ) Self-test results are printed out By No.1 Telephone

[*] [9] [0] [#]

FELCOM 80

H1-26

2. Description of Status Monitor Display (on PC)

FELCOM 80

H1-27

FELCOM 80

H1-28

FELCOM 80

H1-29

5. How to update Terminal Program

FELCOM 80

H1-30

Reference) Making System Program Procedure 1. Turn on the PC. (C:\>) 2. Insert the FELCOM 80 system program disk in disk drive of PC. 3. Type “a:install”. (C:\>a:install) 4. Press the [Enter] key. System program is copied to hard disk. 5. Remove system program disk and insert blank floppy disk. 6. Press [Enter] key. First the disk is formatted. It takes about one minute. After

formatting is completed, the MS-DOS and the FELCOM 80 system program are automatically copied to the blank disk.

7. The calender (date) format display appears. Select format desired. 8. To sellect the American format, for example, press [2] and [Enter]. The date appears

at the top right corner on the normal display. 9. Specify directory where to store TELLEX message. You may select the default name

of “TELEX” by selecting “Yes”, or use a different name selecting “No”. 10. When the display shows c:\> turn off the power.

H2-1

1. Connection

FELCOM 81

FELCOM 81 + HSD (IB681)

Note)

To connect the HSD modem, Inmarsat communication unit must be modified.

Refer to the IB-681 installation manual.


TX/RX RF

GYRO

24VDC

CARD READER

NMEA

VDU

PRINTER

TEL1

TEL6

DATA

JUNCTION BOX

Terminal(IB-581)

Printer(PP-510)

Terminal(PC)

TEL

KEY Board

FAX

IB-360

AD-100

MCT-1540-55

IB-350

IB-301

IB-312

Class 2 only

IB-281

IB-281MAX. 3set

8D-FB-CV (30m)12D-SFA-CV (100m)

TX/RX RF

DATA-1(RS-232C)

DATA-1(RS-422)

GYRO

24VDC

AC100/200V

CARD READER

NMEA

VDU

PRINTER

TEL1

TEL6

DATA

JUNCTION BOX

Terminal(IB-581)

Printer(PP-510)

Terminal(PC)

TEL

KEY Board

FAX

IB-360

AD-100

MCT-1540-55

IB-350

IB-301

IB-312

Class 2 only

IB-281

IB-681

IB-281MAX. 3set

8D-FB-CV (30m)12D-SFA-CV (100m)

TX IF

RX IF

REF

HSD CTRL

TX IF

RX IF

REF

HSD CTRL

EX)Dial UP RouterPC

FELCOM 81

H2-2


Settings item


IB-181 Limit switch Antenna hatch direction

Depend on the Antenna installation.

IB-281 RF CONV board:R135

Tx RF signal output level.

Depend on the Antenna cable

length.

Cable length 8DFB-CV 10 to40m:Marked position (default) 40 to 50m:CW MAX. 12DSFA-CA 50 to 100m:CW MAX.

FC622SL1WG Pb: Pushbutton [STO] [#] [*] [STO] TEL FC755D1

Dialing format DIP SW #1 ON

Dialing format PB Modem speed: 9600 (B FAX) 9600bps

Modem speed:2400

2400bps

Monitor ON or OFF Language Japanese or English

FAX

*PFX-50

ECM OFF

Refer to section “3.4 FAX settings:PFX-50”.

AAB IMN 4Char. X [F4][3][8]

Reentering AAB:[Alt]+[Ctrl] type “ANSWER”

Entering OID/DID

Assigned OID/DID

CPU2 DIP SW S2#2 ON or

Displaying the commissioning menu by commands **Job number & Pass word** - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE - Password : FELCOM81

DMG message: Ship’s name

Ship’s name :4Char.

[F4][6][3] 1:Abbr.ship’s Name 2: Maritime 3:Undesignated

Terminal Unit

IB-581

Network Setup Select sea area [F4][6][4]

*PFX-50

All Memory Clear

When the FAX is turned off for a long period, it dose not function properly, became of

abnormality of the FAX’s memory (RAM) contents.

1. Turn the power off.

2. While pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*] keys together, turn the power on.

3. Preset various settings.

FELCOM 81

H2-3

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item.

Setting item


OFF: Direct call

No.1 TEL: - Register the TEL number: *51* LES 00 Country code xxxxxxx # - Clear the registered number: *51*#

SW Panel DIP SW#1

Automatic call

ON: Address call Call start with reception of DTR signal from HSD terminal.

OFF: RS-449 SW Panel DIP SW#2

Terminal Interface

ON: RS-232C

Interface with HSD terminal. RS-449:D-SUB 37pin

RS-232C: D-SUB 25pin Never use both RS-232C and RS-449 terminal on the HSD modem at the time.

OFF: NO SW Panel DIP SW#3

Automatic data rate switching ON: YES

OFF: HDCL SW Panel DIP SW#4

Command format ON: BSC

- High level data link control - Binary synchronous communication

OFF: 8 bit/no parity SW Panel DIP SW#5

Character format ON: 7 bit/odd parity

64k

IB-681

Date rate SW Data rate 56k

56k is for USA ISDN circuit

Reference: IB-681)

Registering, Deleting Subscriber Number

Register subscriber number as follows with the No.1 telephone. The subscriber number

may contain 20 digits (*,# cannot be registered). The number can be confirmed by

printing the status display.

1. Pick up the handset of the No.1 telephone and confirm dial tone.

2. Dial subscriber’s No. as follows;

*51* aaa 00 bb xxxxxxxxx # subscriber number

Country code

Automatic Dialing

Land Earth Station (LES)

Prefix for HSD call

Deleting subscriber number

Dial [*] [5] [1] [*] [#].

FELCOM 81

H2-4

3. Setting procedure

3.1 Adjustment of limit switch (Antenna unit: IB-181)

3.2 Tx RF output Level setting (Communication unit: IB-281) The longer the antenna cable the more the TX RF signal is attenuated.

Adjust potentiometer R135 on the RF CONV Board according to antenna cable length

as follows:

The IB-281, right side view

FELCOM 81

H2-5

3.3 Setting of Telephone

1. FC622SL1WG

Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. The handset should be on the

hanger.

1. Press the [STO] key

2. Press the [#] key.

3. Press the [*] key to display “Pb”.

Press the [STO] key again.

3. FC755D1

Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows.

1. Insert tip of mechanical pencil under plastic cover to remove cover, and then remove

memo paper.

2. Use the tip of the mechanical pencil to set DIP switch.

3. Restore memo paper and plastic cover.

OFF

ONPB

DP

S

L

2 3 41

DIP SW #1: ON

Bell OFF

FELCOM 81

H2-6

3.4 FAX settings: PFX-50

1. Clearing contents of RAM To clear all contents of RAM, turn the power on while pressing and holding down the [1] [3] and [*] keys together. 2. How to set up FAX

The setting changes to the factory default if the machine is not used for about one month

or more. Follow the steps below to set up the fax.

1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*].

2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES].

3. Enter ship’s name by referring character code list in the operator’s manual.

4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES].

5. Enter the fax number of own station.

6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice.

7. Press [FUNCTION/NO] to change line type from DP to PB.

8. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice.

9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 9902101230 for 12:30, February 1999.

10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. After 2 seconds, “TEL/FAX” appears.

11. Press [FUNCTION/NO] three times.

12. Press [YES], [NO], and then [NO].

13. Press [YES], and then [NO] four times.

14. Press [YES].

15. Press [YES].

16. Change receiving mode to FAX by pressing [AUTO RCV/YES] several times.

FELCOM 81

H2-7

3. How to turn off ECM

Depending on the fax model of the receiving station, necessary is turning off ECM

(Error Correction Mode) of the fax PFX-50. The procedure is;

1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3].

2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]

and [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order.

Now the screen should show “FUNC0=00010010”

Note)

Press 00010000 in that order to change modem speed from 9600 bps to

2400 bps, 10: 9600bps, 00: 2400bps.

FUNC 0=0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears.

4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM.

The third digit from right is for ECM on and off.

Note) FUNC 18=0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order.

6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.

ECM ON/OFF

0:OFF 1:ON Line MON ON/OFF

0:OFF 1:ON

Modem speed

00: 2400bps 10: 9600bps

FELCOM 81

H2-8

Reference)

FELCOM 81

H2-9

Setting Modem Speed, Turning Line Monitor ON/OFF

Changing dialing format Change dialing format “Pulse” to “Pushbutton”. See page H2-8.

B-FAX: 9600bps

FELCOM 81

H2-10

Changing language from Japanese to English

FELCOM 81

H2-11

3.5 Terminal settings

1. Entering AAB

Press [F4], [3] and [8] in this order at normal display.

Enter your ship’s answer back code given by Inmarsat, the press the [Enter] key.

Normally, answer back code consists of telex IMN given by Inmarsat and four

characters your applied to Inmarast for.

EX) TELX IMN No. 4characters X

343164830 JFKS X

Note) Reentering AAB

1. Press [F4], [3] and [8] in this order at normal display.

2. While pressing and holding down both the [Alt] and [Ctrl] keys, enter cipher code;

[A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R]

The AAB stored in the memory is erased.

2. OID/DID Settings OID,DID settings are entered through the commissioning menu on the Communication

Unit Setup menu. The commissioning menu can be displayed in two ways: by entering a

command or changing the setting of a DIP switch.

Case-1) Displaying the commissioning menu by commands

1. At the standby display, press [F4] [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu.

2. Type FURUNOSERVEICE as the Job No.:

[F][U][R][U][N][O][S][E][R][V][I][C][E]. Press [Enter] key.

3. Type FELCOM81 as the password:[F][E][L][C][O][M][8][1]. Press the [Enter] key.

4. Go to the Communication Unit Setup menu and press [6] and the [Enter] key to

display the commissioning menu. Go to item case-2)-3 in next page.

!

!! ATTENTION: CAN NOT

FELCOM 81

H2-12

Case-2) Displaying the commissioning menu by changing DIP switch setting

1. Turn off the communication unit. Turn on S1#2 on the CPU2 Board.

2. Turn on the communication unit.

3. OID/DIS setting

Note)

The OID/DID numbers assigned from Inmarsat are;

Voice : 01 –0F TELEX : 31 – 3F

FAX : 11 – 1F HSD 56k: 42*

DATA : 21 – 2F HDS 64k: 41*

*: In rare cases, 56k HSD:41 and 64k HSD: 42; 56k HSD:41 and 64k HSD: 51

9: HSD 56k TEL 64k

SYS CPU –13 or above

FELCOM 81

H2-13

How to set OID/DID for HSD After the modification of the communication unit for the HSD, the OID/DID for

the HSD communication must be set by using the following procedure.

1. Press [F4] [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu.

2. Type “FURUNOSERVICE” as the Job No.

3. Press [Enter] key.

4. Type “FELCOM81” as the password.

5. Press [Enter].

6. Press [6] [Enter] to display the commissioning menu.

7. Press [6] [Enter] to display the OID/DID registration menu.

8. Press [9] for HSD ID registration.

9. Enter the ID(s) assigned by the organization for the HSD64 and/or HSD56

communication.

10. Set the telephone terminal number to be used for HSD call. In the example

below, No.3 telephone is used for HSD call.

If provided, the DTMF (Dial Tone Multi Frequency) signal from the HSD

terminal can be connected to the telephone terminal on the communication unit

IB-281. In this case, the telephone number to be used must be entered on the

HSD ID line, but the OID/DID setting for the telephone is not required. If the

DTMF signal is not connected to the communication unit and is not provided, no

telephone number is entered on the HSD ID line and the No.1 telephone is used

for the HSD calling.

In the example below, the OIDs/DIDs for the HSD56 and the HSD64 are 41 and

51 respectively. The DTMF signal from the HSD terminal is connected to the

No.3 telephone terminal, that is, the calling from the HSD terminal is made by

using the No.3 telephone line. Note that no ID is entered on the No.3 TEL/FAX

line.

FELCOM 81

H2-14

[OID/DID Registration]

TEL FAX ID

1: 01 -- 7: Data 21

2: 02 -- 8: Telex 31 123456789

3: -- -- 9: HSD (64k) 51 TEL3

4: -- -- (56k) 41

5: -- --

E: Exit

FELCOM 81

H2-15

3. Setting up DMG message (Class 1 only)

4. Setting up Network Setup menu

FELCOM 81

H2-16

4. Self Test

4.1 IB-581

FELCOM 81

H2-17

4.2 Description of Status Monitor Display

FELCOM 81

H2-18

FELCOM 81

H2-19

FELCOM 81

H2-20

5. How to update the Terminal program



2. After a message "OK to quit system? Yes/No" has appeared,


A prompt "A:\>" will appear.






- press [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L] and [Enter] keys, successively.




To confirm the version of the terminal program,

- press [F1] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.

FELCOM 81

H2-21

Reference) How to use HSD Checker Using MES loop back service, the function of HSD modem can be checked by

following the steps below. This test requires the HSD Checker (no code number).

1. Turn on the FELCOM 80/81 and the HSD modem IB-680/681.

2. Confirm that the READY (SYNC&READY) lamp on the front panel of the

IB-280/281 comes on.

3. Connect the HSD checker to the “RS-422” or “RS-232C” terminal.

4. Set the DIP switches on the checker. For example, to check the RS422 port, set the

RTS and DTR switched to the lower position, and others to the upper position.

Figure 1) Front panel of HSD checker

5. Set the DIP switches on the front panel of the IB-680/681 for RS-422 direct-call.

-SW1 (Automatic call) Set to OFF :Direct call ON :Address call

-SW2 (Terminal I/F) Set to OFF :RS-442 ON :RS-232C

(Depend on connected port.)

-SW3 to SW 8 Set to OFF

DIP Switches

FELCOM 81

H2-22

6. Register the telephone number for the loop back service. For example;

Register the telephone number

Parth : *51* 222 0061 29 3334699#

Burum: *51* 012 0031 10 2947020#

You can check register the telephone number ;

Press * 9 6 # on the No.1 telephone.

7. Set the DTR switch on the checker to the upper position to commence the call. TX

and SYNC LEDs on the HSD modem come on. If TX LED does not light, check DIP

switch setting. If the SYNC LED does not come on, the receiver circuit may be

defective.


8. LEDs, CR11 to CR18 light irregularly for about 10 seconds. Then, some LEDs

come on according to the setting of the sending data pattern switch.

CR11 to CR18

DTR switch

FELCOM 81

H2-23

9. Change the sending data pattern switch setting. If the on/off pattern of the LEDs

CR11 to CR18 changes according to the sending data pattern switch setting, the

HSD modem is normal. The sending data pattern switches from left to right do not

correspond to the LEDs CR11 to CR18. The synchronization of both patterns

depends on the timing.


In the example of Figure 4 ;

Sending data pattern: ON/ON/OFF/ON/ON/OFF/ON/ON

Receiving data pattern:

OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/ON (normal) – left figure

ON/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/OFF (abnormal) – right figure

Correct receiving pattern Wrong receiving pattern

Figure 4) Sending data pattern and receiving data pattern

10. Set the DTR switch to lower position to terminate the call.

11. Clear the registered telephone number:

Press * 5 1 * # on the No.1 telephone.

Sending data pattern switches

H3-1

1. Connection One compact communication unit allows us to use full Inmarsat B services: telephone, fax, telex, 9.6k data (MSD), and HSD communications. The FELCOM 82 works from AC power supply, 110 VAC or 220 VAC. There are two models of FELCOM 82: FELCOM 82A (class 1) and FELCOM 82B (class 2). The FELCOM 82A consists of an antenna unit, a communication unit, a handset, a junction box, a printer, a telex terminal unit, and distress alert buttons. The FELCOM 82B does not have a telex terminal unit. The optional multi-communication unit increases the number of telephone and/or facsimile machine that may be connected from 3 sets to 10 sets. A telephone, a facsimile machine, a multi communication unit (PBX), an incoming indicator, and a credit card call adapter are also supplied optionally. The telephone distress alert button may be located at either the IB-362, or at the handset hanger, which utilizes a built in distress alert button. The system requi


Handset & Hanset hanger

IB-882IB-882/362(Tel DIS)

Junction box

IB-313

No.1 Telor FAX

MJ-2S

MJ-2S Telor FAX

No.3-1MJ-2S

No.2 Telor FAX

MJ-2S

No.3 Telor FAX

MJ-2S

IncomingIndicator IB-372

TLX DISALT Button IB-352

TEL DIS Button IB-362

NAV

Mul

ti co

mm

unic

atio

n un

it

Tel or FAX

No.3-2MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-3MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-4MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-5MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-6MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-7MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-8MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

100/220VAC

100/220VAC

100/220VAC

Credit call adapter& Card Reader

ANT

HANDSET

JUNCTION

Antenna unitIB-182

Gyro Gyro

Terminal unitIB-582

PrinterPP-510

Keyboard

Class-1

Class-2

VDU

PRINTER

24V

24V

PC(For MSD)

PC(For HSD)HSD I/F

MSD

HSD

(9.6k data)

(56/64k)EX) KlasHpopper PCMCIA-400/PCI-400

8D-FB-CV:30/50m12D-SFA-CV:100m

IB-282Communication unit

AC IN

AC IN

To TEL3 port

IB-7

82

IB-781

Can not be used when IB-882/362 is used.

FELCOM 82

H3-2

2. System settings

2.1 Heading alignment The system detects the heading direction at every power-up by using the limit switch in the antenna unit. The switch is factory-adjusted so that the antenna is installed with the access hatch located in the stern. When the antenna unit is installed with a directional offset of 90, 180 or 270 degrees, following adjustment is necessary.

1. Mark the four screw locations on the disk. 2. Loosen the four screws fixing the disk. 3. Rotate the disk according to the access hatch position. For example, if the hatch is

located on the starboard side, rotate the disk 90 degrees counter clockwise. 4. Tighten the screws. 5. Confirm that the limit switch hits when the antenna points toward the ship’s bow.

Disk

Protrusion

Limit switch

Screws fixing the disk, 4pcs.

FELCOM 82

H3-3

2.2 Telephone setting

2.2.1 Changing dialing system

The telephone FC755D1 is factory-set to pulse telephone system, so it must be changed to push-button (PB) dialing system by using the steps below.

1. Use the tip of a pen or other pointed object to remove the plastic cover. 2. Remove the memo sheet. 3. Set #1 of DIP switch to ON. (#2 to #4 remains unchanged; OFF position) 4. Replace the sheet and the cover.

DP L

PB S

SidetoneLine type

Bell off

ONOFF

2.2.2 Activating echo cancel

In voice communications, when a land subscriber speeches into the microphone, he/she may hear own voice like an echo from the loudspeaker on the handset. The echo canceller eliminates the echo from the handset of the land subscriber. The echo cancel function is set on the Echo Cancel menu as follows. Opening the Echo Cancel menu needs a password.

1. Press [FUNC] [7] [4] to open “Echo Cancel” menu. If the password is requested, press [FUNC] [6] [3], and type 5963, followed by [Enter]. Then type [7] [4].

2. Type the numeric key corresponding to the line to be set. 3. Press [2] to turn on the echo cancel function.

FELCOM 82

H3-4

2.2.3 T/Rx Volume level setting

The system provides T/Rx volume (Codec Level) setting function for the voice communication. This function is set on the “Codec Level” menu as follows. 1. Press [FUNC] [*] [2] [6] [3] [3] [2].

“Codec Level” appears as follow.

Codec Level Codec IN: 20 Codec OUT: 80

Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]

2. Set Codec IN level and Codec OUT level to a desired value.

Codec IN adjusts Tx level and Codec OUT Rx level. The adjustable range is 10 to 90. 3. Press [Enter] key.

2.3 Fax setting (PFX-50) At installation and when the machine is not used for one month or more, the fax machine must be set up again.

2.3.1 Changing dialing parameters

To change dialing parameters, 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*].

(This step is to clear the memory.) 2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 3. Enter ship's name by referring character code list in the operator's manual. 4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 5. Enter the fax number of own station. 6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 7. Press [FUNCTION/NO], then, change line type from DP to PB (tone dialing). 8. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 0102101230 for 12:30,

February 10, 2001. 10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 11. After "01-02-10 TEL" appears, press [AUTO RCV/YES] to change the display to

"01-02-10 FAX. "

FELCOM 82

H3-5

2.3.2 Turning on ECM

When sending a large number of pages and large images, turn on Error Correction Mode or ECM. Otherwise, a communications error will occur. When the ECM is set to ON, “EC” is displayed on the display and when it is set to OFF, “G3” appears. To turn on ECM;

1. Turn on the fax machine while pressing and holding down [1] and [3]. 2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]

[FUNCTION/NO] [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show FUNC0=000100010.

3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears. 4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM.

The third digit from right is for ECM on and off. 5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order. 6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.

2.3.3 Sending fax via voice line

To send fax via voice line, change the modem speed from 9600 to 2400 by following steps below.

1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3]. 2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]

[FUNCTION/NO] [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show FUNC0=000100010.

3. Press [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] [0] [0] [0]. 00010010: 9600 bps, 00010000: 2400 bps

4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order. 5. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.

FELCOM 82

H3-6

2.4 Gyro setting The communication unit has a built-in gyro I/F board, 64P1106, identical to the one used in Furuno large radars. The board must be set up according to the type of the gyro connected.

2.4.1 Switch and Jumper Setting The default settings are shown in shaded cell of each setting item. (Turn off the unit to change the settings.) 1) Gyro type

Gyro Type SW1 #4 SW1 #5 SW1 #6 JP1 AC synchro OFF OFF OFF #1, #2, #3 DC synchro OFF OFF OFF #2, #3, #4 DC step ON OFF OFF #4, #5, #6 Full-wave pulsating current OFF ON OFF #4, #5, #6 Half-wave pulsating current ON ON OFF #4, #5, #6

2) Frequency

Frequency SW1 #7 SW1 #8 Remarks 50/60 Hz OFF OFF AC synchro pulsating current 400 Hz ON OFF AC synchro pulsating current 500 Hz OFF ON AC synchro pulsating current DC ON ON DC synchro, DC step

GYRO I/F Board (64P1106)

Default setting -Type : AC synchro -Frequency : 50/60 Hz -Rotor Voltage : 60 VAC to 135 VAC -Stator Voltage : 60 VAC to 135 VAC -Gear Ratio : 360X -Supplied Power : 30 VAC to 135 VAC

FELCOM 82

H3-7

3) Rotor voltage (between R1 and R2)

Rotor voltage SW2 #1 JP3 Remarks 20 to 45 VAC ON #2 30 to 70 VAC OFF #2 40 to 90 VAC ON #1 60 to 135 VAC OFF #1

4) Stator voltage (between S1 and S2)

Stator voltage SW2 #2 SW2 #3 JP3 Remarks 20 to 45 VAC 20 to 60 VDC

ON OFF #2

30 to 70 VAC 40 to 100 VDC

OFF OFF #2

40 to 90 VAC ON OFF #1 60 to 135 VAC OFF OFF #1

5) Ratio

Ratio SW1 #1 SW1 #2 SW1 #3 Remarks 360x OFF OFF OFF 180x ON OFF OFF 90x OFF ON OFF 36x ON ON OFF

6) Supply voltage

Supply voltage JP4 JP5 Remarks 20 to 45 VAC 20 to 60 VDC

#2 #2

30 to 135 VAC 40 to 100 VDC

#1 #1

7) NMEA data output interval

SW2, #4 selects the output interval either 2 sec. or 1 sec.; ON: 2 sec. and OFF: 1 sec. 8) AD10 data output interval

Select to 25 ms by changing the jumper block on JP6 and JP7 corresponding to the output port. Do not use 200 ms.

FELCOM 82

H3-8

FELCOM 82

H3-9

2.4.2 Heading set up

If the gyro reading does not match the one displayed on the handset or terminal unit, complete the following procedure with the handset.

1. Press [FUNC] [5] [2] in this order. The “52 Gyro” menu is displayed.

5 2 G y r o

G y r o : 0 0 0H o l d : O F F

E n t e r : [ E n t ]

2. Press the down arrow key to move the cursor onto “Hold.” 3. Press the left arrow key to turn on Hold function. 4. Press up arrow key to move the cursor onto “Gyro.” 5. Enter the gyro reading using numeric keys. 6. Press down arrow key to move the cursor onto “Hold.” 7. When the gyro indication is equal to the gyro reading, press the right arrow key,

followed by [Enter] key. 8. Use the [FUNC] key to close the menu. 9. Confirm that the gyro indication on the handset follows the change of the ship's

heading.

FELCOM 82

H3-10

2.5 Setup NAV data input circuit

Depending on the input signal, nav data input circuit must be modified as below.

NMEA-2.0(IEC-61162) : RS-422 J19 short (Default) NMEA-1.5 : C.Loop J19 open

J19

NAV DATA

J17

8

9

R228 R227

100390

J19

U126

U133 U133

NMEA INCR56

FELCOM 82

H3-11

2.6 Entering answer back code (only for class-1) The answerback code required by telex communication is registered onto the terminal unit, IB-582. The answerback code is 9-digit IMN (Inmarsat Mobile Number) plus 4-letter telex answerback applied to the Inmarsat. To register the answerback code,

1. Press [F4] [3] [8] in this order.

Cursor

!! ATTENTION: CAN NOT REENTER !!

Answerback Code

---------------------------------------------

2. Enter the answerback code. For example, IMN is 343164810 and 4-letter answerback is JFKS, type; 343164810 (space) JFKS (space) X “X” must be always added for ship earth station.

3. Press [Enter] key.

Reentering answerback code When you enter a wrong answerback code, type ANSWER while pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn] to erase it.

FELCOM 82

H3-12

2.7 OID/DID setting Originating and Destination Identifications (OID/DID), assigned by the authority, must be programmed onto the EEPROM, U91 on the CPU board in the field. If not, calls cannot be accepted throughout the Inmarsat B network. The network can identify the system onboard a ship, using factory-programmed Forward/Return IDs, but it cannot identify the end terminal and service type. In other words, the FELCOM 82 must be able to determine which port should ring when a call comes in, and also, whether the call is a voice call, a fax call, an HSD call, etc. in addition, it must know which ID number is utilized on an outgoing call. HEX ID numbers must be programmed into the FELCOM 82 so that the proper port /mode is identified. The OID/DID is used by the LES to identify the desired end terminal and the route between SES (Ship Earth Station). The OID/DID is “HEX” values” detailed below.

Voice: 01 to 0F Fax: 11 to 1F Data: 21 to 2F Telex: 31 to 3F 56k HSD 41 (or 42 depending on the authority) 64k HSD 42 (41, or 51 depending on the authority)

For example, if the SES installed to provide 3 telephones, 1 facsimile, 1 9.6k data, 1 telex, and 64k HSD, OID/DIDs for these should be:

Handset: 01 Telephone-1: 02 Telephone-2: 03 Fax machine: 11 9.6k data (PC): 21 Telex machine: 31 64k data: 42

The following explains how to enter OID/DIDs when you do not receive OID/DIDs, but IMNs from the authority. For example, a given vessel applies for and receives 8 ID numbers. Of these numbers, 3 are voice, 1 is fax, one is Telex, one is MSD, one is HSD/56 and one is HSD/64. If the ID's received from INMARSAT are;

399999990 voice 399999991 voice 2 399999992 voice 3 399999993 FAX 399999994 telex 399999995 9600 data 399999996 HSD/56 399999997 HSD/64

FELCOM 82

H3-13

The OID / DID settings should be: Handset port, voice: 01 Tel-1 port, voice: 02 Tel-2 port voice: 03 Tel-3 port FAX: 11 PC 9600: 21 Telex machine: 31 HSD (56k) 41 (51or 42 depending on the authority) HSD (64k): 42 (41 or 51 depending on the authority)

In this scenario, a person calling the vessel from a shore phone would call 399999990, and the handset would ring. If they dialed 399999991, the phone that was plugged into port two would ring.

If someone wanted to send a FAX to the vessel, they would dial 399999992, and port number 3 (FAX) would then ring. The fax machine would be plugged into port three, and would then answer the call and receive the fax.

2.7.1 Preprogramming OID/DID from terminal unit

To preprogram OID/DID; 1. Press [F4] [6] in this order to call “Comm. Unit Setup” menu. 2. Type FURUNOSERVICE on the JOB No. line and press [Enter] key. 3. Type a password, FELCOM82 and press [Enter] key. Note that the password you

typed does not appear on the display. Now, you can select “5:Commissioning.”

FELCOM82 InmarsatB MES [Communication UNIT IB-282] Copyright (C) FURUNO Electiric Co., Ltd, 2000 (Type “HELP” or “?” for help) [Main Menu] 1:Ocean Region 4:Test 2:DMG Setup 3:Network Setup Enter JOB No.: FURUNOSERVICE Password: FELCOM82 [Main Menu] 1:Ocean Region 4:Test 2:DMG Setup 5.Commissioning 3:Network Setup Enter JOB No.:

Communication Unit Setup

Not displayed

FELCOM 82

H3-14

4. Press [5], followed by [Enter] key. 5. Press [6], followed by [Enter] key to call “OID/DID Registration” menu.

2:Ship Position 3:Commitioning Request Switch 4:Telephony Baseband Port Switch 5:Frequency Measurement Switch 6:OID/DID Registration E:Exit Enter JOB No.:6 OID/DID Registration TEL FAX ID 1:HSET _ _ 5:DATA _ 2:TEL1 _ _ 6:TELEX _ ________ 3:TEL2 _ _ 7:HSD(64k) _ 4:TEL3 _ _ (54k) _ E:Exit Enter No.:

6. Press numeric key corresponding to that on which line you enter the OID/DID, followed by [Enter] key. For example, to enter FAX OID/DID for TEL3 line, press [4], followed by [Enter] key.

TEL FAX ID 1:HSET 01 _ 5:DATA 21 2:TEL1 02 _ 6:TELEX 31 343199710 3:TEL2 03 _ 7:HSD(64k) 42 HSET 4:TEL3 _ 11 (54k) 41

7. Type OID/DID, followed by [Enter] key. Note)

1. TEL1 to TEL3 lines are used for either telephone or fax. 2. TELEX OID/DID must be entered together with the telex number. 3. To use the handset on the fax machine for voice communication,

a) Enter TEL and FAX OID/DIDs on the same line. For example, the PFX-50 is connected to the TEL3 line, enter 02 and 11 on the TEL3 line. Now the handset on the fax machine can be used as telephone.

b) Change the receive mode to TEL. c) Prefix dialing is unnecessary.

4. In item number seven, a phone port may be selected to initiate a manually dialed HSD call. For example, if TEL2 is selected, TEL2 may then be used to DIAL an HSD call.

8. Press [Esc] to close the menu.

Communication Unit Setup

FELCOM 82

H3-15

2.7.2 Programming OID/DID from handset

To preprogram the OID/DID, 1. Press [FUNC] [5] [9] to call “59 OID/DID” menu.

If the password is requested, press [FUNC] [6] [3], type 5963 as a password, and press [Enter]. Then, press [5] [9].

63 Change Mode

User-!Administrator Enter Passwd: - - - - Enter: [Enter]

2. Select the desired line. For example, to enter TEL OID/DID onto the TEL1 line, select TELFAX1.

59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID TEL FAX1 NUM 1 TELFAX1 5 TELEX OID DID 2 TELFAX2 6 MSD TEL: _ _ / _ _ 3 TELFAX3 7 HSD IMN:__________ 4 HANDSET 8 PBX FAX: _ _ / _ _ Select:[Ent] Select:[Ent] IMN: Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]

[1]

FELCOM 82

H3-16

3. Enter OID/DID and INM. For example, to enter TEL OID/DID of 02 on the TELFAX1 line, press 0202. Press the down arrow key to move the cursor onto the INM line. Type IMN number followed by [Ent] key. a) [Mode] key alternates between numeric and alphabetic entries. b) Wrong entry can be corrected by moving the cursor over it and type new

number. c) Press [Ent] key to enter the procedure.

59OID/DID 59OID/DID 59OID/DID TEL FAX1 NUM HANDSET NUM TELEX NUM OID DID OID DID OID DID TEL: _ _ / _ _ TEL: _ _ / _ _ TLX: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________ IMN: __________ IMN: __________ FAX: _ _ / _ _ IMN: ___________ Enter:[Ent] Enter:[Ent] Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit] Quit:[Quit] Quit:[Quit]

59OID/DID 59OID/DID MSD NUM HSD NUM OID DID OID DID TEL: _ _ / _ _ 64k: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________ IMN: __________ 56k: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________ Enter:[Ent] Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit] Quit:[Quit]

4. Press [FUNC] key. 5. Set the password if it is not set yet.

TELFAX OID/DID HANDSET OID/DID TELX OID/DID

MDS(9.6k) OID/DID HSD OID/DID

FELCOM 82

H3-17

2.7.3 When IB-782 (PBX) is installed: The IB-782 is connected to TEL 3 port and their OIDs/DIDs are set as below.

1. Press [FUNC] [5] [9] in this order to call “59 OID/DID”.

59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID 1 TELFAX1 5 TELEX 2 TELFAX2 6 MSD

3 TELFAX3 7 HSD 4 HANDSET 8 PBX

Select:[Ent] Select:[Ent]

2. Press [8] to select PBX Mode ON/OFF.

59 OID/DID PBX Mode:OFF ON/OFF Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]

3. Press [8] to select PBX Mode ON/OFF.

59 OID/DID PBX Mode:OFF ON/OFF Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]

Junction BOX

IB-313

No.1 Telor FAX

MJ-2SNo.3-1MJ-2S

No.2 Telor FAX

MJ-2S

Multi communication unit

Tel or FAX

No.3-2MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-3MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-4MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-5MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-6MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-7MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

No.3-8MJ-2S

Tel or FAX

100/220VAC

JUNCTION

IB-282Communication unit

AC IN

TEL3

TEL3-1

TEL3-2

TEL3-3

TEL3-4

TEL3-5

TEL3-6

TEL3-7

TEL3-8

TEL1

TEL2

IB-782

LINE

FELCOM 82

H3-18

4. Press the left arrow key to turn ON the PBX Mode.

DID (Direct in dial) should be OFF. Press [ENT] to return to Main menu.

59 OID/DID Main Menu PBX Mode:ON 1

ON/OFF 2 DID Mode:OFF 3

ON/OFF 4 Display Enter:[Ent] Select:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]

5. Press [5] [9] to call “59 OID/DID”.

59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID 5 TELEX

1 TELFAX1 6 MSD 2 TELFAX2 7 HSD 3 TELFAX3-PBX 8 PBX 4 HANDSET

Select:[Ent] Select:[Ent]

6. Press [3] to open “3 TELFAX3-PBX” menu.

59 OID/DID EXT:01 NUM OID DID TEL: _ _ / IMN: ___________ FAX: _ _ / IMN: ___________ Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]

7. Enter the port number of the PBX to which the telephone is connected: 01 to 08. Enter OID/DID and IMN.

[Ent]

FELCOM 82

H3-19

2.8 HSD set up This procedure is done from the Administration mode. See “2.8 About password” for how to choose the Administration mode. Press [FUNC Quit] and [8] to select the HSD menu. The HSD menu appears as follows.

1. Dest. No 6. Cammand 2. Call TEL 7. Character 3. Data Rate 8. Ignore DTR 4. Dial Method 9. Print HSD 5. Auto Rate

Destination no. For a direct call key in subscriber’s complete ISDN number, beginning with LES number. Maximum 20 digits may be used. Prefix dialing cannot be used. Call TEL (TEL-1, 2, 3, HANDSET) Chooses the handset or telephone to use for HSD calling. The default setting is Handset. Data Rate (64 k / 56 k) Choose the data rate from 64k and 56k. The default setting is 64k. Confirm data rate of subscriber before setting. Dial Method (Direct / Address) Choose the dial method from Direct (DTR) and Address (V.25bis). The default setting is Direct.

-Direct means direct call. When the HSD Terminal turns on communications begins with party registered on the HSD menu. This call is also referred to “Hot Dial.” -Address means address call. Calling begins after specifying subscriber (CRN command) at the HSD Terminal. This call is also referred to “V.25bis Dial.”

Auto Rate (ON / OFF) Auto Rate determines whether or not to receive an HSD call whose data rate is different from that set on the HSD menu. The default is OFF which prevents receiving. Use the OFF setting for an HSD Terminal which cannot automatically adjust its synchro clock to match data rate. Command Format (HDLC / BSC) Set the V.25bis command format for address calls sent from the HSD Terminal to the FELCOM 82. Select HDLC (default setting) or BSC depending on specifications of the HSD Terminal.

FELCOM 82

H3-20

Character Format (8 bit None / 7 bit Odd) Choose the character format for address calls sent from the HSD Terminal to the FELCOM 82. Select 8bit (default setting) or 7bit depending on specifications of the HSD Terminal. Ignore DTR (Normal / Ignore) When an HSD call is received, the FELCOM 82 responds to the call without checking “DTR” signal from the terminal units. When “Norma” is selected, the FELCOM 82 check the DTR signal before the response.

2.9 About password The system provides two handset menus: User and Administrator. The administrator menu needs a 4-digit password. The system is delivered with the password set to 0000. When the password is 0000, it has no effect and all menus can be called by anyone. See Chapter 8 menu tree for the difference between the user and administrator menus.

2.9.1 Setting password.

To set a password; 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [7] to call “67 Password” menu on the handset.

67 Password Old : - - - - New: - - - - Conf: - - - - Enter:[Ent]

2. Type 0000 on the “Old” line. Asterisks appear in place of the password.

3. Move the cursor onto the “New” line by using the down arrow key. 4. Type the new 4 digit password. 5. Move the cursor onto the “Conf” line by using a down arrow key. 6. Type new password again and press [Enter] key. 7. The message “Password is changed.” is displayed and the Main menu

appears 3 seconds later.

FELCOM 82

H3-21

2.9.2 5963

When servicing, you will not use the user password. A special number 5963 unlocks the handset menu. 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [3] to call “63 Change Mode” menu. 63 Change Mode

User-!Admin Enter Passwd: - - - - Enter: [Enter]

2. Enter 5963 as a password, and press [Enter]. Now you can enter the administrator

menu through the displayed main menu. Once you escape from the main menu, the next main menu is of the user mode.

2.9.3 Factory reset of password menu

If the user forgets the password, complete the following procedure and the password will return to 0000. Other menu settings will remain unchanged.

1. Press [FUNC] [6] [3] in this order, using the handset. 63 Change Mode


2. Enter 5963, followed by [Enter] key. 3. While the main menu is on the screen, press [6] [7] to call “67 Password” menu.

67Password

Old : - - - - New: - - - - Conf: - - - - Enter:[Ent]

4. Enter 5963 onto the “Old” line. ([Enter] key not pressed) 5. Move the cursor to the “New” line and enter 0000. 6. Move the cursor to the “Conf” line and enter 0000. 7. Press [Enter] key. After "password is changed" is shown, the main menu

appears 3 seconds later. 8. Make sure that the user enters a new password. If the menu remains unlocked, all

menus are accessible and system settings may be inadvertently changed.

FELCOM 82

H3-22

2.10 Returning settings to factory defaults Clear the RAM to set the menu to factory-defaults.

2.10.1 By using terminal unit

To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [F4] [6] to call Communication Setup menu. 2. Type CLR (space) RAM on the “Enter JOB No.” line and press [Enter] key. 3. Type DENPA4 on the “Password” line and press [Enter] key. 4. Wait for a while so that the status display is redrawn.

2.10.2 By using handset

To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [FUNC], [6], and [9] in this order to call “Initialize” menu.

69 Initialize All data & logs Are cleared. ARE YOU SURE? Clear:[82] Quit:[Quit]

If you cannot get into “Initialize,” press [FUNC] [6] and [3] to call “Change Mode” menu. Type the password or 5963 followed by [Enter] key if you cannot find the password. The menu changes to Main Menu when you enter password or 5963. While the Main Menu on the screen, type [6] [9] to call “Initialize” menu.

63 Change Mode


2. Press [8] and [2] in this order to clear the memory and wait until “Now Initializing” disappears.

FELCOM 82

H3-23

3. Self-test

3.1 Using handset You can get into the test menu only while in the administration mode. If the system is locked, enter the password 5963 to change the mode, and follow the steps below to access the test menu. 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [8] in this order to show the Test menu.

68 Test 1 Version 2 Memory 3 Distress Select:[Ent]

2. Press [2] to carry out memory test. 3. Press [Enter] to begin the test. During the test, “Testing ….” appears. The test result

appears as follows. To change the page, press up or down arrow key.

68 Test 68 Test !! !" Memory Test Memory Test MAIN OK SYNC OK TERM OK DECODE OK DEMOD OK HANDSET OK Quit: [Quit] Quit: [Quit]

4. If necessary, press [HOLD Print] key to print out the test result. The following

message is printed.

------------------ 68 Memory Test <2001-01-10 00:00(UTC) ---------------------------

----- TEST TESULT ----- MAIN OK DEMOD OK TERM OK SYNC OK HANDSET OK DECODE OK ANTENNA OK

!→ ←"

FELCOM 82

H3-24

The table below lists RAMs and ROMs that are tested during the memory test. The SYS CPU sends read and write commands to each memory location.

Item Circuit ROM RAM MAIN System CPU U95, Flash U130, U134, U136, U139 DECODE Decoder DSP U16, Flash Built into DSP TERM Terminal DSP U46, Flash Built into DSP SYNC Synchronous DSP U9, Flash Built into DSP DEMOD Demodulator DSP U3, Flash Built into DSP HANDSET If communication between Handset CPU and SYS CPU is normal, the

test result is OK. ANTENNA PCU CPU checks ROM/RAM in PCU.

3.2 Using terminal unit The same self-test as the one carried out from the handset can be made from the terminal unit. To test the unit;

1. Press [F4] [6] [4] and [Enter] in this order. 2. Press [Y] key followed by [Enter] key. The test result appears on the screen as

follows.

… Now executing Test (cannot abort) …

----- TEST RESULT ----- MAIN OK DEMOD OK TERM OK SYNC OK HANDSET OK DECODE OK ANTENNA OK

The table below lists RAMs and ROMs to be tested during the memory test. The SYS CPU sends read and write commands to each memory location.

Item Circuit ROM RAM MAIN System CPU U95, Flash U130, U134, U136, U139 DECODE Decoder DSP U16, Flash Built into DSP TERM Terminal DSP U46, Flash Built into DSP SYNC Synchronous DSP U9, Flash Built into DSP DEMOD Demodulator DSP U3, Flash Built into DSP HANDSET If communication between Handset CPU and SYS CPU is normal, the

test result is OK. ANTENNA PCU CPU checks ROM/RAM in PCU.

FELCOM 82

H3-25

3.3 Reading program number

3.3.1 Using handset

To display program numbers press [1] key while the test menu (68) is on the screen. The program numbers are listed on two pages. To change the page, press up or down arrow key.

68 Test 68 Test !! !" Version List Version List MAIN XX SYNC XX TERM XX CECODE XX DEMOD XX HANDSET XX Quit: [Quit]

To printout the program list, press [HOLD Print] key.

------------------ 68 Version List <2001-01-10 00:00(UTC) --------------------------- MAIN 165-0145-0xx DEMOD 165-0142-0xx TERM 165-0146-0xx SYNC 165-0143-0xx HANDSET 165-0152-0xx DECODE 165-0144-0xx

3.3.2 Using terminal unit

To display program numbers, press [F4] [6] [4] and [Enter] in this order.

<<Program No.>> DEMOD 165-0142-0xx SYNC 165-0143-0xx DECODER 165-0144-0xx TERM 165-0146-0xx HANDSET 165-0152-0xx CPU 165-0145-0xx ANTENNA 165-0102-0xx

!→ ←"

FELCOM 82

H3-26

3.4 Distress alert test (FUNC683) Very Important! Carry out the test within 30 seconds, or actual distress alert is transmitted. Distress alert test mode lasts only for 30 seconds.

3.4.1 Telephone To test the telephone distress button;

1. On the handset, press [FUNC] [6] [8] to call Test menu. 2. Press [3] key, followed by [Enter] key. DISTRESS TEST MODE appears on the

handset screen, and printed out is “DISTRESS TEST Mode entered.”

2001-01-10 00:00UTC DISTRESS TEST MODE #III POR Ready

3. Within 30 seconds, press “DISTRESS” button on the handset or IB-362 for more than 6 seconds.

“Telephone Distress Button Pressed.” and “Telephone Distress Button Activated” are printed out.

4. Press off-hook key. 5. Type LES code in three digits and press [#] key. You can hear the replay from the

LES, recorded on the tape. 6. Press on-hook key to terminate the test.

“DISTRESS TEST Mode exited.” is printed out.

FELCOM 82

H3-27

3.4.2 Telex (for class-1)

Before the test, confirm that the DMG ([FUNC] [5] [8]) is setup correctly. During the test, data in the Distress Message Generator (DMG) is sent to the LES selected by [FUNC] [5] [7]. To test the telex distress button;

1. On the handset, press [FUNC] [6] [8] to call Test menu. 2. Press [3] key, followed by [Enter] key. DISTRESS TEST MODE appears on the

handset screen, and printed out is “DISTRESS TEST Mode entered.”

2001-01-10 00:00UTC DISTRESS TEST MODE #III POR Ready

3. Within 30 seconds, press “DISTRESS” button on the IB-352 for more than 6

seconds. “Telex Distress Button Pressed.” and “Telex Distress Button Activated” are printed out.

The test alert message is transmitted automatically and the reply from the LES should be received. Yamaguchi replays the following messages, for example.

4. Press [F10] key to terminate the test.

--------------TELEX DISTRESS ALERT MESSAGE------------------------------------- 01-01-30 05:26 YMI 003 343199710 FRTS X THIS IS INMARSAT RECORDED MESSAGE. TO 343199710 FRTS X MARITIME LAT 34 45 N , LONG 135 21 E 05 26 UTC , 30 JAN 10 215 00 UR TEST DISTRESS CALL HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY RECEVED. PLEASE REMENBER TO RE-SET 04894856 59 ‘ROUTINE’. END OF MESSAGE. CECI EST UN ACCUSE DE RECEPTION PRE-ENREGISTRE D’INMARSAT. VOTRE ESSAI D’APPEL DE DETRESSE A REUSSI. VEUILLEZ RETABLIR L’INDICATEUR DE PRIORITE EN MODE ‘ROUTINE’. FIN DU MESSAGE. ---- +END OF CALL+ -------------------------------------------------------------------------

FELCOM 82

H3-28

3.5 Status monitor The SYS CPU handles the status monitor.

3.5.1 Display on handset

To show the monitor screen on the handset; 1. Press [FUNC] [4] [1] in this order. 2. Press an arrow key to change the page.

41 Monitor 41 Monitor Heading 270 Tx EIRP 000 Az 119 Tx RF 000 El 30 Rx C/N 053 LAT 34:00.00 N Rx IF AGC 154 LON 135:00.00 E

41 Monitor 41 Monitor Rx Synth OK ANT REMOTE Tx Synth OK El Axis OK Rx Ch 11292 Az Axis OK Tx Ch 10000 Cross El OK

3. Press [HOLD Print] key to print out the status if necessary.

------- 41 Monitor <2000-06-20 00:00(UTC)> ------------------------------- Current Satellite POR Tx EIRP Level 000 Channel Status SYNC Tx RF Level 000 MES Status Ready Rx C/N 053 Rx IF AGC Level 154 Heading 270 DEG Antenna Bearing 209 DEG Rx Synthesizer OK Antenna Azimuth 119 DEG Tx Synthesizer OK Antenna Elevation 30 DEG Antenna Status REMOTE Position LAT 34:00.00N El AXIS OK LON 135:00.00E Az AXIS OK NAV DATA NMEA Cross El AXIS OK GYRO DATA OK Rx Channel 11292 Tx Channel 10000

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

4. Press [FUNC Quit] key several times to close the menu. Refer to 7.4.3.

FELCOM 82

H3-29

3.5.2 Display on terminal unit

The same items are monitored on both the terminal unit and the handset, with the exception of the data and time indication. In addition to the system time, the terminal unit has own time which is displayed at the upper right-hand corner of the terminal screen. The time is set by using the following its procedure. System time: The Real Time Clock (RTC) on the CPU board generates date and time. When time between RTC and ZDA from a navaid differs more than 30 seconds for 30 seconds or more, the RTC is reset by using ZDA data. If ZDA is not available, RMC is used. Time and date displayed on the handset are system time. Furthermore, the communication log also uses system time. Terminal unit time: The file created on the terminal unit is labeled by this time. To preset time and date, press [F4] [3] [1] and [F4] [3] [2] respectively.

Date 2001-01-10 Tx EIRP Level 000Time 00:00:00(UTC) Tx RF Level 000

Rx C/N 053Current Satellite POR Rx IF AGC Level 154Channel Status SYNC MES Status Ready Rx SYN OKTx OFF Tx SYN OK

Heading 270 DEGAntenna Bearing 209 DEG Antenna Azimuth 119 DEG Antenna Status REMOTE Antenna Elevation 30 DEG El AXIS OK

AZ AXIS OKPosition LAT 34:00.00N Cross El AXIS OK

LOG 135:00.00E

NAV DATA NMEA Rx Channel 11292 GYRO OK Tx Channnel 10000

(01-01-10 00:00:00)

a

b

c

d

e

f

h

g

Terminal unit time System time

FELCOM 82

H3-30

3.5.3 Details of status monitor

MES status - Current Satellite (POR/IOR/AOR-E/AOR-W/Stat 5 to 8) Indicates satellite (Ocean Region) acquired by SYS CPU. Stat 5 to 8 are not used.

- Channel Status (SYNC/UNSYNC) Indicates that the system is synchronizes with the receiving channel or not. The synchronization is made when SYNC DSP acquires frame sync signal three to four times.

- MES Status (Wait/Ready/Busy) *Wait: Appears when the channel status is UNSYNC. *Ready: Appears when the channel status is SYNC and Ocean region has been registered. *Busy: Appears during communication.

- Tx: (ON/OFF) The SYS CPU generates TX ON/OFF signal.

Antenna status

- Heading Ship’s heading from a gyrocompass or one entered manually. SYS CPU receives heading data. - Antenna Bearing The Bearing is horizontal direction angle between ship’s heading and the satellite. - Antenna Azimuth The azimuth angle is the angle between North and the horizontal satellite direction. - Antenna Elevation The elevation angle is the satellite height above the horizon as seen from the ship.

AZ=Heading + Bearing

Ship Heading

SatelliteTrue North

Antenna Azimuth

Heading

Antenna Bearing

FELCOM 82

H3-31

Position Own ship’s position received from the navaid; Acceptable NMEA sentences: GGA (V.02), RMC, GLL, RMA, and ZDA; Priority: GGA>RMC>GLL>RMA; Invalid data is not received.

Input data

- NAV DATA (NMEA/NONE) On the terminal unit, NMEA or NONE appears. On the handset, NAV blinks when no NAV data or manual position data is input and nothing appears when data is input correctly. - GYRO (OK/NONE/HOLD) On the terminal unit, OK or NONE appears. On the handset, GYRO blinks when no gyro data is input and nothing appears when data is input correctly. During the HOLD, GYRO appears on the handset.

TX/RX level - Tx EIRP Level (33/29/25) Indicates Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) from the antenna. The output of the HPA is sent to the SYS CPU via the PCU to calculate EIRP level. The NCS (LES in case of TLX) assigns the EIRP according to the spot beam to be used. Each call from the ship includes azimuth and elevation data of the antenna.

LNA ChassisHPA

Duplexer

Antenna

LAN

PCU

DET

PowerCONT

EIRP MONPower Control

FSK

Tx RF Q5U1

EIRP 33dBW 29dBw 25dBW

- Tx RF Level (12 to 38) The output of the RF CON board, +7 dBm to +11 dBm is picked up and sent to the SYS CPU. The figure below shows TX RF level (dBm) versus TX RF level indication. The reading is 12 to 38 normally. The error messages #0160 and #0162 are related to the RF CONV circuit.

FELCOM 82

H3-32

RF CON

DET

Tx RF Level

Tx IF Q12

U44

56MHz

Tx Local

Tx RF

+9dBm

10

20

30

40

0 5 10 15 20dBm

TX RF LEVELIndcation

TX RF output level (dBm)

Reference level: 9+2dBm

- Rx C/N (40 or more) The input signal to the SYNC DSP is picked up and sent to the SYS CPU for the calculation of Carrier per Noise (C/N). When the receiver circuit is normal, C/N is 40 or more.

CPU

U51Rx IF

A/D10.7MHz

BPSK/QPSKDemodulator

DEMODDSP

SYNCDSP

DECODEDSP

C/N data

U49 U29(AD6620AS) U30 U34 U39

RF CON

FELCOM 82

H3-33

On the handset, three vertical bars (short, medium, and long) right to the antenna symbol indicate the C/N data or signal quality. The number of the bar versus C/N value is;

CESH (HSD) CESD/CESV (FIU/Data/Voice) NCSC

(Telex)

59 or more: 3 bars 53 or more: 3 bars 48 or

more: 3 bars

56 or more: 2 bars 50 or more: 2 bars 44 or more: 2 bars

53 or more: 1 bar 47 or more: 1 bar 40 or more: 1 bar

52 or less: no bar 46 or less: no bar 39 or less: no bar The following figures show the change of C/N when the azimuth and elevation angles are changed from the antenna position where the strongest signal is detected.

- Rx IF AGC Level (150 or more) AGC level used in the receiver circuit on the RF CON board is detected and sent to the SYS CPU. If it is 150 or more, the circuit is normal.

20

40

0-10 +10-20 +20

C/N LEVELIndcation

AZ Degree

60

NGNG

20

40

0-10 +10-20 +20

C/N LEVELIndcation

EL Degree

60

NGNG

RF CON AGC Level

U20

U17U21U21

U13U3 U8Rx IF

1/22/2

Rx HSD Circuit

Rx Non HSD Circuit10.7MHz

R33

U16(10.7MHz)

AGC ADJ

FELCOM 82

H3-34

Synthesizer - Rx SYN (OK/NG) The local oscillator for the receiver consists of VCOs of 730 MHz and 815 MHz bands and PLL ICs. When either PLL unlocks, the SYS CPU generates NG signal.

- Tx SYN (OK/NG) TX local oscillator, consisting of PLL and VCO oscillates between 1682.4 MHz to 1702.56 MHz. When the PLL unlocks, the SYS CPU generates NG signal.

Antenna controls

- Antenna Status (REMOTE/FAULT) When the SYS CPU communicates with the PCU in the antenna unit normally, REMOTE is indicated. If not, FAULT comes on. At power-up, FAULT appears until the antenna initialization is complete.

RF CON

U23PLL IC

U15PLL IC

815M band

VCO-1

730M band

VCO-2

FL5

FL7

Ref. 21.12MHz

Ref. 21.12MHz

1535.7 -1555.7MHz

Rx IF10.7MHz

Rx RF1525-1545MHz

CR8

CR9

Rx UNLOCK

U4,11

CONTDATA

DATACONT

RF CON

U30PLL IC

VCO

Ref. 21.12MHz

1682.4 -1702.56MHz

Tx RF1626.5-1646.5MHz

CR7

U44Tx UNLOCK

Tx IF56MHz+120kHz

U35CONTDATA

FELCOM 82

H3-35

- El AXIS (OK/NG) When the elevation axis control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on.

- AZ AXIS (OK/NG) When the azimuth control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on.

- Cross El AXIS (OK/NG) When the cross-elevation axis control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on.

TX/RX channels

- Rx Channel Receiving channel in use is displayed. Inmarsat B system uses CH6000 (1525 MHz) to CH14000 (1545 MHz). Default setting is CH06000 (1525 MHz).

At power up, when the elevation angle is changed, and when the ocean region is changed, 1) MES searches the strongest spot beam in signal level. 2) After the completion of the channel scanning, the registration of the ocean

region is made on the NCS common channel. Thus the NCS knows the area where MES locates.

- Tx Channel Transmission channel in use is displayed. Inmarsat B system uses CH6000 (1626.5 MHz) to CH14000 (1646.5 MHz). Default setting is CH10000 (1636.5 MHz).

At every call request, MES sends AZ and EL data to NCS. The spot-beam identities are advised to SES via the NCSC Bulletin Board to allow identification of the appropriate spot-beam for signaling purposes. If appropriate spot-beam signaling chancels are not available, the SES will select a global-beam channel.

FELCOM 82

H3-36

3.6 Using two-digit code service (Loopback test) Some LESs in the Inmarsat networks support automatic line test service for telephone and telex. The following describes how to use this function.

3.6.1 Telephone test Using two-digit code telephone service (Code 91), the telephone communication of the system can be tested.

1. Dial the LES followed by the service code of 91. For example, to call Goonhilly, press [0][0][2][9][1][Enter].

2. You should obtain the tone signal from the LES for 15 seconds. (Tone signal) 3. Wait for 15 seconds after stopping the tone signal. (Silence) 4. Talk into the handset microphone. Your voice will be heard from the handset

receiver with a delay. The test will automatically terminate after 30 seconds. (Loop back test)

3.6.2 Telex test Using two-digit code telex service (Code 91), the telex communication of the system can be tested.

1. Call the LES with the service code of 91. ([F3][2], enter LES and service code) The system should receive the following message transmitted from the LES.

01-03-03:10 YMP 003 3413xxxxx ABCD X GA+ 91+ THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890

FELCOM 82

H3-37

3.7 9.6k Data test This section describes how to test 9.6k data (MSD) function. The COM port on the PC is connected to the MSD port on the FELCOM 82 communication unit. 3.7.1 Using AT command To check communication between the PC and the communication unit;

1. Double click on the Modem icon in the Control panel window. 2. Select “standard 9600 bps modem.” 3. Select communications port, or COM port to be used for 9.6k data

communication. 4. Start HyperTerminal from the Windows 95/98 start menu. 5. In the HyperTerminal window, type AT, followed by the [Return] key. The

FELCOM should reply with “OK.” If it does not, check the cable and try again. If there is still no response, check the COM Properties window.

Bits per second: 9600 Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Flow control: Hardware

6. Type AT&H, followed by [Enter] key. The command list should be displayed.

3.7.2 Connection to Internet provider

If a number of the Internet Service Provider is available, try to access to an Internet web site. To do so,

1. Complete the Dial-up Networking setting; Standard 9600bps modem and TCP/IC protocol.

2. Make sure that FELCOM 82 is in stand-by condition. 3. Call Service Provider

FELCOM 82

H3-38

3.8 HSD test This section describes how to test HSD function. 3.8.1 How to use HSD checker Using MES loop back service, the function of HSD can be checked by following the steps below. This test requires the HSD checker (no code number) which operates from 110 Vac and 220 Vac power sources without modification.

1. Connect the RS-449 connector of the HSD checker to the HSD port. 2. Set the DIP switches on the checker for RS-422 signal: set the RTS and DTR

switches to OFF position, and S1 to S5 to ON position.

CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18 CR1CR2CR3CR4CR5CR6CR7CR8CR9 CR10

Received Data Pattern

Sending Data Pattern

ON

OFF

RTS

TxD RI DCD DSR CTS RxCLK TxCLK

RS422

RS232C

ONON

OFF OFF

RTS

DTR

DTR RxD

S1S2S3S4S6

S5S7

S8S9S10S11S12S13S14S15

Front panel of HSD checker

3. Turn on the FELCOM 82 and wait until the system acquires NCS common channel.

4. Using the handset, make settings in HSD menu as below. To call HSD menu, press [FUNC] [8].

1) Dest. No.: Parth : 222 0061 29 3334699# or

Burum : 012 0031 10 2947020# 2) Call TEL: HANDSET 3) Data Rate: 64k 4) Dial Method: DIRECT 5) Auto Rate: OFF 6) Command: HDLC 7) Character: 8 bit/None 8) Ignore DTR Normal

FELCOM 82

H3-39

5. Set S6 on the checker to the upper position to commence the call.




ON

OFF

RTS


RS422

RS232C

ONON

OFF OFF

RTS

DTR

DTR RxD

S1S2S3S4S6

S5S7

S8S9S10S11S12S13S14S15

6. Wait for about 10 seconds until on/off pattern of LEDs CR11 to CR18 becomes

steady. 7. Change the sending data pattern switch setting, S8 to S15.




ON

OFF

RTS


RS422

RS232C

ONON

OFF OFF

RTS

DTR

DTR RxD

S1S8S9S10S11S12S13S14S15 S2S3S4S6

S5S7

If the on/off pattern of the LEDs CR11 to CR18 changes according to the sending data pattern switch setting, the HSD works normal. The sending data pattern switches S15 to S8 do not correspond to the LEDs CR11 to CR18 respectively. The synchronization of both patterns depends on the timing. In the example below;

Sending data pattern : ON /ON /OFF /ON /ON /OFF/ON /ON Receiving data pattern:

Left figure : OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/ON (normal) Right figure : ON /OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/OFF (abnormal)

CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18



ON

OFF

S8S9S10S11S12S13S14S15

CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18



ON

OFF

S8S9S10S11S12S13S14S15

Correct receiving pattern Wrong receiving pattern

Sending data pattern and receiving data pattern 8. Set the DTR switch (S6) to OFF position to terminate the call. 9. Change HSD settings for the HSD terminal onboard a ship.

FELCOM 82

H3-40

3.8.2 Connection to Internet service If a number of the Internet service provider is available, access to an Internet web site.

1. Complete the Dial-up Networking setting; HSD modem and TCP/IC protocol. 2. Make sure that FELCOM 82 is in stand-by condition. 3. Call Service Provider

3.9 LED status The LED status is tabulated in this section. 3.9.1 RF CON Board (16P0181)

Parts No. Color Status Item Remarks CR5 GRN Blink

(Looks

like ON)

FSK RX Monitor

This LES is used to check the communication between the antenna and the comm. units. The brightness of the LED depends on FSK data from the antenna unit.

CR6 GRN On TX ON This LED is on during TX and off during RX.

CR7 RED Off TX PLL unlock This LED is on for a while at power up. After the CPU board assigns the channel to be use, LED goes off. The LED should not be on continuously.

CR8 RED Off RX PLL1 unlock (815 MHz)

This LED is on for a while at power up. After the CPU board assigns the channel to be use, LED goes off. The LED should not be on continuously.

CR9 RED Off RX PLL2 unlock (730 MHz)

This LED is on for a while at power up. After the CPU board assigns the channel to be use, LED goes off. The LED should not be on continuously.

SNY UNLOCK IND CR7: TX CR8: RX1 CR9: RX2 CR6: TX ON

CR5: FSK Rx Motor

FELCOM 82

H3-41

3.9.2 SW REG Board (16P0180)

Parts No. Color Status Item Remarks CR22 RED Off Input error When input voltage is out of tolerance,

the LED illuminates. 1) 100 V spec.: 70 to 80 V or less and 140 to 145 V or above. 2) 220 V spec.: 142 to 165 V or less and 280 to 290 V or above.

CR33 RED Off Over current The LED lights when input over current circuits activates.

CR33: Over CUR * Current through primary winding

of main-inverter * Current through primary winding

of sub-inverter * +12V line

CR22: INPUT ER

FELCOM 82

H3-42

3.9.3 CPU Board (16P0182)

TERM F-ROM165-0146-xxx

DECODE F-ROM165-0144-xxx

SYNC F-ROM165-0143-xxx DEMOD F-ROM

165-0142-xxx

SYS F-ROM165-0145-xxx

SYS CPU

FPGA

BATT

TERMDSP

SYNCDSP

DECODEDSP DEMOD

DSP

S4:DEMOD Reset

S5:SYNC Reset

S6:DECODE Reset

S8:TERM Reset

S7:FPGA Reset

S1S2(SYS dip SW)S3

J1

CR

13C

R15

CR

17C

R19

CR

21

CR

10C

R11

CR

12C

R14

CR

16C

R18

CR

20C

R22

CR

23C

R24

CR

1C

R2

CR

3C

R4

CR

5C

R6

CR

7C

R8

CR

9

CR

26C

R27

CR

28C

R29

CR

30C

R31

CR

32C

R33

CR

34C

R35

CR

36C

R37

CR

38C

R39

CR

40C

R41

JP6

J32

J26

TERM SYS DECODE DEMODSYNC

SYNC

LED DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, SYS, TERM

FELCOM 82

H3-43

DEMOD Parts No. Check Item Remarks

CR1 Input level of AD converter

When the AD converter U49 is in saturation or when TP54 is 2 Vpp or more, the LED comes on.

CR2 CR3

Status of DEMOD DSP

On/off: Waiting signal; off/on: Fast Fourier Transforming; on/on: Tracking signal

CR4 CR5 CR6

Communication mode assigned by SYS CPU to DEMOD DSP

On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU; and off/off/on: HSD

CR7 DEMOD DSP status When DEMOD DSP runs, CR7 blinks. CR8 Not used CR9 Selection of input

signal to AD converter

On: At communication other than HSD Off: At HSD communication (Input to AD converter is 1.5 times higher in level than other communications.)

SYNC

Parts No. Item Remarks CR10 CR11

Status of SYNC DSP On/off: Waiting Frame Bit and Unique Word Off/on: Acquiring FB twice or losing FB twice On/on: Synchronized

CR13 CR15 CR17

Communication mode assigned by SYS CPU to SYNC DSP


CR19 DEMOD DSP status When SYNC DSP runs, CR7 blinks. CR21 Frame sync signal After frame synchronization, CR21 toggles on and off

every time frame bit signal is received. DECODE

Parts No. Item Remarks CR12 CR14 CR16

Communication mode assigned by SYS CPU to SYNC DSP


CR18 DECODE reset Every time DECODE DSP is reset, CR18 toggles on and off.

FELCOM 82

H3-44

CR20 Frame reception CR20 toggles on and off when one frame is received and the data is decoded.

CR22 Decoding CR22 turns on during data decoding. CR23 Not used CR24 Not used

SYS

Parts No. Item Remarks CR26 Alarm When the SYS CPU detects an alarm, CR26 lights. CR27 Status of SYS CPU Blinking every second CR28 Sys CPU idling Blinking CR29 System status On; During communication CR30 Sync of RX sig. On: When the system synchronizes with the signal.

Off: When the system does not synchronize. CR31 Not used CR32 Not used CR33 Not used

TERM

Parts No. Item Remarks CR34 Not used CR35 CR36

TERM Status Off/off: idling; off/on: Codec is in operation; on/off: Ship-to-shore fax; on/off: shore-to-ship fax

CR37 CR38 CR39

CODEC Status During voice communication; With the coder activating, CR37 is on. With the decoder activating, CR38 is on. With the echo canceller activating, CR39 is on.

CR40 Not used CR41 TERM DSP When the TERM DSP runs, CR41 blinks.

FELCOM 82

H3-45

3.9.4 PCU Board

Parts No. Color Status Item Remarks CR25 RED On FSK RX Monitor This LES is used to check the

communication between the antenna and the comm. units. The brightness of the LED depends on FSK data from the comm. unit.

Table 7.8.8

3.10 How to check angular rate sensor Flip the angular rate sensor while the antenna unit is turned on, if the antenna changes the angle by a large amount, the sensor may be defective. 3.11 How to check rotary joint To check the rotary joint, carry out forced transmission, and then rotate the antenna by a hand slowly. If the EIRP reading drops during the rotation, the rotary joint may be defective.

D25 FSK

Use this hole to check LED status.

FELCOM 82

H3-46

3.12 Error Messages at the Terminal Unit The tables which follow show the error messages which may appear on the terminal unit.

3.12.1 Call failure error messages

Call failure error messages

Error Messages Reason Remedy Call failed, request data invalid. (4561) Call failed, insufficient digits in service address. (4562) Call failed, invalid service address. (4563) Call failed, invalid credit card data. (4564) Call failed, credit card type not acceptable at this LES. (5522) Call failed, credit card not accepted. (5539)

• Wrong LES or subscriber number.

• Wrong card number in case of credit card.

Check Redial.

Call failed, long interruption in reception at MES. (4962) Unstable reception (MES not synchronized with satellite.)

Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment). (5569) Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment). (5585) Call failed, LES time-out (no service address). (5570) Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector). (5571) Call failed, LES time-out (no credit card data). (5573) Call failed, LES time-out (no return carrier identifier). (5574) Call failed, LES time-out (no MES connect). (5575) Call failed, LES time-out (no answer). (7969) Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES. (5729) Call failed, LES time-out (no MES SCPC carrier). (5826) Call failed, LES time-out (no MES telex carrier). (5825) Call failed, LES time-out (no telex answerback). (5576)

Unstable communications (LES cannot receive reply from ship.)

Call failed, MES time-out (no scrambling vector ack). (4801) Call failed, MES time-out (no credit card accepted message). (4802) Call failed, no service and no scrambling vector. (5572) Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer). (4803) Call failed, MES time-out (no ship terminal answer). (4129)

Unstable communications (MES cannot receive reply from LES.)

Change satellite or LES.

Call failed, service not authorised at this LES. (5538) Call failed, service not provided at this LES. (5505) Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES. (5521) Call failed, no distress service avail. in this OR. (0040) Call failed, call request failure by LES. (0052)

LES does not offer requested service. Change LES.

(Continued on next page)

FELCOM 82

H3-47

Call failure error message (con’t)

Error Message Reason Remedy Call failed, LES congested (no channel unit). (5713) Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested. (5201) Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit). (5202) Call failed, LES congested (no channel). (5457) Call failed, LES congested (no time-slot). (5458) Call failed, terrestrial party busy. (7953) Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure. (8033) Call failed, terrestrial party cleared before MES connection.(8034) Call failed, set-up between LES and terrestrial circuits failed. (7265)

• Line is busy. • Line trouble.

Try again a little while later.

Call failed, MES not authorised at this LES. (5537) Ship’s answerback code not properly entered.

Checking OID/DID

Call failed, Distress call in progress. (0062) Call of higher priority in progress.


Call failed, MES busy. (0060) MES not ready for communications.


Call failed, MES terminal not enabled. (0061) MES not ready for communications.

Setting: Incoming only OFF

Call failed, antenna circuit abnormality. (0032) Call failed, no channel assignment received from LES. (0033) Call failed, invalid power level assignment. (0034) Call failed, RX DEMOD circuit abnormality. (0035) Call failed, TX MOD circuit abnormality. (0036) Call failed, TX-RF circuit abnormality. (0038) Call failed, Selectively cleared by LES. (0039) Call failed, MES unable to sync. to NCSA in time. (0041) Call failed. (0042)

Equipment trouble*

* = Another error message accompanies these messages and is printed out. Trouble can be determined from the printout.

Note 1: Number in parentheses is error message number. Note 2: Wait 30 seconds before calling again.

FELCOM 82

H3-48

3.12.2 Antenna trouble error message

Antenna trouble error message

Error Message Meaning Cause Remedy

OR Change failed. (0100) Satellite selected from Satellite menu not acquired.

Satellite is tracked based on ship’s position.

• Select correct satellite.

• Check navigator.

Sky Scan failed. (0108) Satellite not found although all areas searched.

OR Search failed. (0103) Couldn’t search for satellite.

Equipment trouble or object in transmission path of satellite

Check to RF connectors in Antenna unit. LNA defective.

OR Search disabled. (0105)

During the satellite search, SCAN function is set to OFF by a SCAN command and the search operation is terminated.

Sky Scan disabled.(0110)

During the sky-scan, SCAN function is set to OFF by the command and the scan is terminated.

Step-track halted. (0113)

During the step-tracking, the step-track function is set to OFF by the command and the tracking is terminated.

Step-track out of bounds. (0114)

In auto ocean region selection mode, this message appears at the boundary between two ocean regions, when the elevation angle decreases 5 degrees or less and a satellite higher elevation angle is selected.

• Select correct

satellite. • Check navigator.

Printer trouble

Printer trouble error message

Error Message Cause Remedy

CAUTION: Main Unit Printer error: off-line. (0169) CAUTION: Main Unit Printer error: out of paper. (0170) Printer error

Check connection, paper, etc.

FELCOM 82

H3-49

3.12.3 Communication unit trouble (internal)

Communication unit trouble error messages

Error Message Cause Defective parts

ALARM: ADE Non-carrier EIRP abnormality. (0139) PCU detects EIRP abnormality.

ALARM: ADE EIRP power too low. (0140) HPA output at Tx is below ratings.

ALARM: ADE EIRP power too high. (0141) Output power too high at Tx.

ALARM: ADE EIRP burst too long. (0142) PCU detects abnormal Tx burst width.

HPA chassis

ALARM: ADE RF abnormality - No TX power detected. (0143) PCU cannot detect HPA output power.

HPA chassis RF CON

ALARM: TX Synthesizer unlock. (0145) ALARM: RX Synthesizer unlock. (0146) Unlock signal detected. RF CON

ALARM: Cross EL axis control error. (0147) Cross EL axis control trouble ALARM: Az axis control error. (0148) AZ axis control trouble ALARM: El axis control error. (0149) EL axis control trouble

PCU, Sensors, motors, belts

ALARM: 28V power abnormality. (0154) +28 V not output. SW REG

ALARM: RF-CONV circuit abnormality, TX-RF level insufficient.(0160)

RF CONV Board trouble, Low TX level is found during the Tx.

ALARM: RF-CONV circuit abnormality, Unexpected TX-RF level detected. (0162)

RF CONV Board trouble, High TX level is found when not Tx.

CPU RF CON

ALARM: TX-RF circuit abnormality, TX power insufficient. (0164) EIRP is lower than one specified by the LES.

ALARM: TX-RF circuit abnormality, TX power too strong. (0165) EIRP is higher than one specified by the LES.

HPA chassis RF CON CPU

ALARM: TX circuit abnormality, unexpected TX power detected. Please power off the FELCOM82!! (0166)

EIRP trouble detected for period more than 3 sec. at standby.

HPA chassis

ALARM: Telephone Distress Box Cable abnormality. (0167) Cable for telephone distress button may be damaged or disconnected.

ALARM: Telex Distress Alert Box Cable abnormality. (0168) Cable for telex distress button may be damaged or disconnected.

Cable connection

ALARM: FAN FAILURE (0174) Trouble with fan for power supply SW REG

(Continued on next page)

FELCOM 82

H3-50

Communication unit trouble error messages (con’t)

Error Cause Defective parts ALARM: SYSCPU error detected. (0176) ALARM: HANDSET error detected. (0177) ALARM: DEMOD-CPU error detected. (0178) ALARM: SYNCCPU-CPU error detected. (0179) ALARM: DECODER-CPU error detected. (0180) ALARM: TERM-CPU error detected. (0181)

CPU error CPU

ALARM: ANTENNA error detected. (0182) Antenna Error PCU

FELCOM 82

H3-51

4. Program Update

The table below lists programs for FELCOM 82 and its update commands. Note that RAM clear must be made after the program for SYSTEM is upgraded.

Program Program No. Command Parts No. storing program DEMOD 165-0142-xxx UPDEM Flash ROM U3 on CPU board SYNC 165-0143-xxx UPSYNC Flash ROM U9 on CPU board DECODE 165-0144-xxx UPDEC Flash ROM U16 on CPU board SYSTEM 165-0145-xxx UPSYS Flash ROM U95 on CPU board TERM 165-0146-xxx UPTERM Flash ROM U46 on CPU board HANDSET 165-0152-xxx UPHAND CPU U2 on HS CONT board TERMINAL (IB-582)

165-0150-xxx INSTALL U12 on CPU board

The program number can be read by using the following keystrokes.

IB-582: [F4] [6] [4] Handset: [FUNC] [6] [8] [1]

The terminal program number can be read by pressing [F1] white pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn]. The command to select the drive is as below.

Terminal Unit Drive Designators Disk Drive A Flash ROM IB-581 B Floppy Disk A Floppy Disk IB-582 C Flash ROM

Table 4.1.2 To terminate FELCOM 82 system program and get into DOS system, press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously. This procedure is the same as one for FELCOM 12, FELCOM 81, and DP-6.

FELCOM 82

H3-52

4.1 Connection If the system does not have the terminal unit or the system is class-2, connect COM1 port of the terminal unit (IB-581 or IB-582), or RS-232C port of a PC to the communication unit IB-282 as illustrated. Either VDU port or J1 port is used for updating the program. When the VDU port is hard of access, remove the front panel and use the J1. Communication speed is 57.6 kbps with VDU and 38.4 kbps with J1. The type of the interconnection cable is 16S0068 with a connector fitted to both ends.

Front view, front cover removed

J1

VDU

COM 1

J1 on CPU board

RS-232C 9P D-sub connect

•IB-581/582:COM1 Port •PC:RS-232C Port

RS232C

or or

57.6kbp

38.4kbps

FELCOM 82

H3-53

4.2 Upgrading SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM programs

4.2.1 Using IB-581 or IB-582

To upgrade SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM programs; 1. For example, using IB-582

Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM 82 system program.

“OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to “Yes” and press [Enter] key. Prompt

C:¥> appears. 2. Inset the floppy disk having new software into the drive. 3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 4. Type update command. For example, to upgrade SYSTEM program, type UPSYS

and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.

A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.25 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.

5. Turn on the IB-282, if it is off. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed” on the terminal unit.

6. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 7. Turn off the IB-282. 8. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level. 9. After updating the SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents.

FELCOM 82

H3-54

4.2.2 Using PC

To upgrade the system program by using a PC, follow the steps below. 1. Run the DOS on the PC. 2. Inset the floppy disk having new software into the drive. 3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 4. Type update command. For example, to upgrade SYSTEM program, type

UPSYS and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn. A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.25 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.

5. Turn on the IB-282, if it is off. The program upgrading proceeds while the

indication “xxx percent completed” on the terminal unit. 6. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 7. Turn off the IB-282. 8. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level. 9. After updating the SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents.

4.2.3 After upgrading SYSTEM (RAM clear)

After upgrading SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents by using the terminal unit or the handset. The contents in the memory are listed in chapter 1.

1) By using terminal unit

To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [F4] [6] to call Communication Setup menu. 2. Type CLR (space) RAM on the “Enter JOB No.” line and press [Enter] key. 3. Type DENPA4 on the “Password” line and press [Enter] key. 4. Wait for a while so that the status display is redrawn.

FELCOM 82

H3-55

2) By using handset

To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [FUNC], [6], and [9] in this order to call “Initialize” menu.

69 Initialize All data & logs Are cleared. ARE YOU SURE? Clear:[82] Quit:[Quit]

If you cannot get into “Initialize,” press [FUNC] [6] and [3] to call “Change Mode” menu. Type the password or 5963 followed by [Enter] key if you cannot find the password. The menu changes to Main Menu when you enter password or 5963. While the Main Menu on the screen, type [6] [9] to call “Initialize” menu.

63 Change Mode


2. Press [8] and [2] in this order to clear the memory and wait until “Now Initializing” disappears.

4.3 Upgrading handset program

4.3.1 Using IB-581 or IB-582

To upgrade the handset program; 1. Unplug the handset. 2. For example, using IB-582

Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM 82 system program.“OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to Yes and press [Enter] key. Prompt C:¥> appears.

3. Inset the floppy disk having new handset program, 165-0152-xxx into the drive. 4. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 5. Type UPHAND and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.

FELCOM 82

H3-56

A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.

6. Plug the handset when “TARGET POWER ON” appears on the IB-582 (581). 7. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed”

on the screen. If upgrading does not commence, press [C] key while holding down [Ctrl] key for the prompt of A:¥>, and then proceed from step 1.

8. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 9. Turn off the IB-282 and IB-582 (581). 10. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level.

4.3.2 Using PC

To upgrade the program by using a PC, follow the steps below. 1. Unplug the handset. 2. Run the DOS on the PC. 3. Inset the floppy disk having new handset program into the drive. 4. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 5. Type UPHAND and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.

A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...)

FELCOM 82

H3-57

Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.

6. Plug the handset when “TARGET POWER ON” appears. 7. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed”

on the screen. If not, press [C] key while holding down [Ctrl] key for the prompt of A:¥>, and then proceed from step 1.

8. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 9. Turn off the IB-282 and a PC. 10. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level.

4.4 Upgrading terminal program To upgrade terminal program;

1. Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM B system program. “OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to Yes and press [Enter] key. Prompt C:¥> sappears.

2. Inset the floppy disk having new terminal software into the drive. 3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 4. Type INSTALL and press [Enter] key. 5. The program upgrading proceeds and DOS prompt display comes after upgrading

is completed. 6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again. to 7. Press [F1] while pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn] to read the program

version level.

FELCOM 82

H3-58

5. Menu tree

5.1 Menu on handset The italic letters show items in the user menu, and the underlines show factory defaults.

FUNC Quit Key

*: For future use

(To next page)

*: Needs OID/DID

User Menu1234 Display 1 Monitor 2 Comm. Log

3 Time&Charge 1 List by LES 2 List by PID 3 Data Clear4 System Log 5 Print All 6 Print Setup7 Print MES8 Print TELFAX9 Print MSD*0 Print HSD*

5 Setup 1 Satellite 1 AOR-E 2 POR 3 IOR

4 AOR-W 5 Sat5 6 Sat6 7 Sat7 8 Sat8 0 AUTO

2 Gyro Gyro [000~359] Hold [ON/OFF]

3 Antenna Azimuth [000~359] Elevation [00~90] Heading [000~359]

AutoTrack [ON/OFF]

4 Position LAT [00.00 N] LON [000.00 E]

5 Area 1 WMO* 2 IMO* 3 ICAO*

4 NAVAREA [No.1, No.2]

6 Backup NCS*

7 Distress LES 1 AORE 2 POR 3 IOR 4 AORW

5 Sat5 (Not Used) 6 Sat6 (Not Used) 7 Sat7 (Not Used) 8 Sat8 (Not Used)

FELCOM 82

H3-59 (To Next Page)

(From Previous Page)

8 DMG 1 Name 2 Maritime [Yes, No]

3 Nature

1 Fire/Explos 2 Flooding 3 Collision4 Grounding 5 Listing 6 Sinking 7 Disable & Adr 8 Undesignate 9 Abandoning

4 Course (000~359)5 Speed (00~99)

9 OID/DID

0 RcvAlarm 1 Disable 2 Enable

6 MES 1 Handset 1 BackLight [0~3, 3 ] 2 IdleLight [0, 1 ]

3 LCDBright [0~9, 5 ] 4 BuzzerVol [0~9, 7 ] 5 KeyClick [OFF, ON ]

2 Menu Style 1 Simple 2 Detailed

3 Change Mode

4 Date&Time 1 Date&Time 2 Date Form 1 YYYY-MM-DD 2 MMM-DD-YYYY 3 DD-MMM-YYYY 3 Time Zone [-13:30~+13:30, +00:00 ]

5 Charge Info

6 Personal ID 1 PID [Disable, Enable]

2 PID Entry 3 List/Edit

7 Password

8 Test 1 Version 2 Memory 3 Distress Test

9 Initialize

0 ForcedClear

FELCOM 82

H3-60

(From Previous Page)

ABBR Find * Key 1 Entry

2 Edit*

3 Remove*

4 HSD Call**

* : Not displayed when no abbreviated dialing numbers are registered.

** : Not displayed unless HSD OID/DID is registered and HANDSET is selected in the Call TEL menu.

8 Ignore DTR 1 Normal2 Ignore

9 Print HSD

7 TELFAX 1 Time Limit 1 TEL1 1 OFF 2 TEL2 2 Limit Time [01~99] 3 TEL3 3 Answer Only

2 Credit Call 1 TELFAX1 [OFF, ON] 2 TELFAX2 [OFF, ON]

3 TELFAX3 [OFF, ON]

3 Prefix Code

4 Echo Cancel 1 TEL1 [OFF, ON]

2 TEL2 [OFF, ON]3 TEL3 [OFF, ON]4 HANDSET [OFF, ON]

5 Print TELFAX

8 HSD 1 Dest. No 2 Call TEL 1 TEL1

2 TEL2 3 TEL3 4 HANDSET

3 Data Rate 1 64k (64Kbps) 2 56k (56Kbps)

4 Dial Method 1 DIRECT 2 ADDRESS

5 Auto Rate 1 OFF 2 ON

6 Command 1 HDLC 2 BSC

7 Character 1 8bit/None 2 7bit/Odd

FELCOM 82

H3-61

5.2 Menu on terminal unit (Class1)

F1 Key (File)

1. New Text [ALT + N]

2. Open Text [ALT +O] Load Merge

3. Close Text [ALT + Q]

4. Save Text [ALT + S]

5. Delete File [ALT + D]

6. Rename File

7. Print File [ALT + P]

8. Clear Comm Memory

9. Format Disk

F2 Key (Edit)

1. Undo [ALT + X]

2. Cut [DEL]

3. Copy [ALT + C]

4. Paste [INS]

5. Select All [ALT + A]

6. Search [ALT + F] Forward Backward

7. Replace [ALT + R] Forward Query Backward All

8. Goto Top [HOME]

9. Goto Bottom [END]

A. Goto Line [ALT + L]

B. Change Text [ALT + V]

FELCOM 82

H3-62

F3 Key(Telex)

1. Auto Telex [ALT + T] 1. Station Name SEND 2. LES Access Code CANCEL

3. File to Send

2. Call LES 1. LES Access Code SEND 2. Priority 1. Routine CANCEL

2. Safety 3. Urgent 3. Service Code

3. Call Station

4. Transmit File

5. Program Telex 1. Station Name ENTRY2. LES Access Code DELETE

3. File to Send 4. Program Mode 1. One Time

2. Interval 3. Schedule

6. Confidential Msg

7. Communication Log

8. Change Window [ALT + W]

F4 Key (Setup)

1. Station List 1. Stn. Name 2. Telex No. 3. Answerback 4. Remarks

2. LES List 1. LES Access Code 2. LES Name 3. Remarks

3. Terminal Setup 1. Date 2. Time

3. Date Display Form 1. YY-MM-DD 2. MMM-DD-YY3. DD-MMM-YY

4. Screen Saver 1. Mode ON 2. Mode OFF

5. Comm Time Display 1. Display ON 2. Display OFF

6. Incoming Call Alarm 1. Alarm ON 2. Alarm OFF

7. Special Char 1. Default 2. Norway 3. Sweden 4. UK5. Spare 1 (Not Used) 6. Spare 2 (Not Used)

8. Answerback Code (To Next Page)

1. Over view Connection of Remote Unit A radiotelephone is connected to a remote unit, such as remote terminal, DSC, and NBDP in Furuno MIF format of which TX/RX data lines are heard-wear selectable for current loop or RS-232C signal.

Maximum four remote units can be connected by using a distributor DB-500 as shown in Figure below.

Each port on the DB-500 can support Current loop and RS-232C signals according to the type of the REMOTE board fitted in the DB-500: REMOTE A board for RS-232C and REMOTE B board for Current loop. Each port has own REMOTE board. The remote unit ports on the DB-500 have priority;

REM-2 > REM 3 > REM-4 > REM 5 There are two types of the DB-500.

DB-500: Standard type REMOTE-1 (IN) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-2 (OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-3 (OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B)

DB-500-RS type REMOTE-1(IN) ----- RS-232C(REM A) REMOTE-2(OUT) ----- RS-232C (REM A) REMOTE-3(OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-4(OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-5(OUT) ----- RS-232C (REM A)

Section I1. Remote Station

REM-A

REMOTE REMOTE

FS-xxxx

DSC/NBDPRS-232C RS-232C

TX/RX Control data

I1-1

REM-A

REM-A

REM-BREM-BREM-A REM-A

RB-500 RB-500DSC-6/60 DP-5/6

FS-1562

DB-500

RS-232C RS-232C

RS-232C

C.Loop C.Loop

[REM1]

[REM5][REM4][REM3][REM2]

REMOTE

I1-2

Note) Option Parts Name Type Code Number Remarks

REMOTE A (05P0457) OP05-39 005-920-310 For RS-232C signal REMOTE B (05P0458) OP05-40 005-920-320 For Current loop signal

TB board 05P0496 005-840-750

Additional Port Kit OP05-44 000-056-823 -Two REMOTE B, - One TB - Two cable glands

There are two types of the remote terminal: RB-500 for SSB and RB-700 for VHF. The ROM in the RB-500 must be 05501-60-100 (option) for RC-808 and 05501-47-103 (standard) for SSB. The VHF remote terminal having the highest priority must be installed where a ship is normally operated. The FM-8500 and FM-8700 itself has the highest priority because of having a built-in DSC.

REMOTE

I1-3

1.1 Remote port specifications

Equipment Port Specification (Default) Option Note

FS-75/2550 Remote RS-232C C.Loop

Select to the REMOTE-A or B board. -RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457) -C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)

FS-1562 Remote RS-232C C.Loop

Select to the REMOTE-A or B board. -RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457) -C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)

REM-1 RS-232C None RS-232C Connect to TB3

REM-2 RS-232C C.Loop

Connect to TB4 Select to Jumper setting in AF board (AF Board suffix number- 33 and after)

REM-3 RS-232C None

FS-5000/8000

CIF/NMEA CIF(C.Loop) None Select to Jumper setting in AF

board and System setting (9933:MIF/TBUS/CIF/NMEA)

RV-117G REMOTE RS-232C None RV-118G RS-232C No RS-232C Install to I/F Board:05P0261 RV-128G RS-232C RS-232C None

XMIT RS-232C None FT-253/803 (Controllr:CU-

5521) RCVER RS-232C None

CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF Select to Jumper setting on CONT

board and System setting (COMM)

DMC(REM-A) C.Loop None VHF(REM-B) C.Loop None

NBDP(REM-C) RS-232C None MF/HF

RT(REM-D) RS-232C None

MF/HF RX(REM-E)

RS-232C None

DSC-5/5A/5R

PRINTER Centronics None Complies with Centronics interface

PP-500 Printer Centronics None Complies with Centronics interface

PP-510 Printer Centronics None Complies with Centronics interface

PP-505 IN/OUT (J2) RS-232C C.Loop C.Loop: Install to OP16-14.

REMOTE

I1-4


CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF Select to Jumper setting in CONT

board and System setting (9:System)

DMC(REM-A) C.Loop None NBDP(REM-C) RS-232C None

MF/HF RT(REM-D) RS-232C None

MF/HF RX(REM-E)

RS-232C None

DSC-6/6A


CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF Select to Jumper setting in CONT

board and System setting (9:System)

DMC(REM-A) C.Loop None VHF(REM-B) C.Loop None

DSC-8V/8VP


DSC RS-232C None AA-50/50R MF/HF TR RS-232C None REMOTE 1 C.Loop None DSC port FM-7000 REMOTE 2 C.Loop None RB-700 port REMOTE C.Loop None RB-700 port

DMC C.Loop None CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF FM-7500


REMOTE 1 C.Loop None DSC port FM-8000 REMOTE 2 C.Loop None RB-700 port REMOTE C.Loop None RB-700 port

DMC C.Loop None NMEA NMEA None FM-8500

PRINTER C.Loop None MIF Serial data (Install to IF-8500; Change to parallel)

REMOTE C.Loop None RB-700 port DMC C.Loop None

NMEA NMEA None FM-8700

PRINTER C.Loop None MIF Serial data (Install to IF-8500; Change to parallel)

REMOTE

I1-5


REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected RT (Standard connection)

REMOTE B RS-232C None Connected DSC (Standard connection)

CIF/NMEA NMEA None Select to Jumper setting in CONT board and Terminal setting.


DP-5

CONTROL RS-232C None Not use REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected the Radiotelephone REMOTE B RS-232C None Connected the DSC

IEC-1162 (NMEA)

IEC-1162 None DP-6/10

PRINTER (Connected IB-581)

Centronics None Complies with Centronics interface

MF.HF DSC C.Loop None No.1 VHF C.Loop None No.2 VHF C.Loop None

SES RS-410N None EGC RS-410N None

NAVTEX RS-410N None Contact signal

DMC-5

2182kHz WR None AF signal

NMEA/CIF NMEA Select to NMEA or CIF (TB Board S1)

ALM BZ RS-410N NX-500

ANT active Select to WIRE or ACT (TB Board S2)

RB-700 TB-1 C.Loop None

RB-500 TB-1 C.Loop None

For RT(FS-xxxx) ROM No. 0550147103 For XMIT(FT-503/803) ROM No. 0550160100

IN RS-232C None OUT RS-232C None OUT RS-232C None

DB-120 (05P0606)

NMEA NMEA None REMOTE 1(IN) C.Loop RS-232C

REMOTE 2(OUT) C.Loop RS-232C REMOTE 3(OUT) C.Loop RS-232C

REMOTE 4(OUT) Option C.Loop or RS-232C

DB-500 (Standard type)

Refer to page I1-1.

REMOTE 5(OUT) Option C.Loop or RS-232C

Select to the REMOTE-A or B board. - RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457) - C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)

REMOTE

I1-6


DTE 1 RS-232C None DTE 2 RS-232C None DMC RS-410N None

RP RS-410N None FELCOM 10

(IC-200)

NMEA/CIF NMEA CIF Select to Jumper setting on CONT board.

REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected IC-200.

PRINTER RS-232C None Complies with Centronics interface

REMOTE B RS-232C None CONTROL RS-232C None PRINTER RS-232C None

FELCOM 10 (IC-500)

CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF

Not used

DTE 1 RS-232C None DTE 2 RS-232C None DATA RS-232C None DMC RS-410N None

BUZZER RS-410N None

FELCOM 11 (IC-211)

NMEA NMEA None REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected IC-211.


REMOTE B RS-232C None CONTROL RS-232C None

FELCOM 11 (IC-511)

CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF Not used

COM 1 RS-232C None Connected IC-211. COM 2 RS-232C None Not used FELCOM 11

(IB-581) PRINTER RS-232C None Complies with Centronics

interface DTE 1 RS-232C None DTE 2 RS-232C None DATA RS-232C None DMC 1 RS-410N None DMC 2 RS-410N None

FELCOM 12 (IC-212)

BUZZER RS-410N None COM 1 RS-232C None Connected IC-212. COM 2 RS-232C None Not used FELCOM 12

(IB-581) PRINTER RS-232C None Complies with Centronics

interface

Printer RS-232C None Complies with Centronics interface

232C RS-232C None ALARM RS-410N None

EGC-5

CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF Select to system setting.

REMOTE

I1-7


DTE 1 RS-232C None DTE 2 RS-232C None

PC DATA RS-232C None


ANT CONT RS-422 None NMEA NMEA or CIF None Automatic change NMEA or CIF. GYRO GYRO None

TEL DISTRESS RS-410N None IB-360 TLX DISTRESS RS-410N None IB-350

FELCOM 80

RX BUZZER RS-410N None IC-301 VDU RS-232C None

DATA RS-232C None CARD READER RS-232C None

RF (Antenna control)

FSK None

NAV NMEA None AD CON None For AD-100

TEL DISTRESS RS-410N None For IB-360 TLX DISTRESS RS-410N None For IB-350

FELCOM 81

RX BUZZER RS-410N None For IC-301 HSD DATA 1 RS-232C None HSD DATA 2 RS-422 None

Selected SW2 setting IB-681

HSD CTRL RS-232C None HSD DATA 1 RS-232C None HSD DATA 2 RS-422 None

Selected SW2 setting IB-680

HSD CTRL RS-232C None

REMOTE

I1-8

2. RB-700 : C.Loop 2.1 Priority settings 1. Priority setting on FM-7000/7500 Determine priority of the RB-700 according to mounting location and vessel regulations.

PANEL board on VHF radiotelephone FM-7000/FM-7500 1. Priority setting on FM-8500 and FM-8700 Priority cannot be set on FM-8500 and FM-8700. 2. Priority setting on FM-8000 Priority order for FM-8000 is set on the system setting.

System Channel 12 ---- Setting No. 1 (ON)

REMOTE

I1-9

2.2 Jumper settings Jumper settings shown below should be made at installation.

Note) Do not change the Jumper settings of JP2 and JP3.

Parts location of JP4 and JP5 on Main board (Parts side)

Parts location of JP1 and JP6 on MAIN board (Soldering side)

REMOTE

I1-10

2.3 Confirmation of jumper settings To confirm jumper settings of JP1 and JP6, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [ENT] key.

To confirm the jumper settings of JP4 and JP5, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [SHIFT] key.

2.4 Speaker and handset volume Speaker Adjust R18 with the VOLUME control on the front panel set at maximum for desired speaker volume. Handset Adjust R9 to select desired handset speaker volume.

REMOTE

I1-11

3. RB-500 : C.Loop 3.1 Jumper settings Jumper settings shown below should be made at installation.

Note) Do not change the Jumper settings of JP2 and JP3.

Parts location of JP4 and JP5 on Main board (Parts side)

Parts location of JP1 and JP6 on MAIN board (Soldering side)

REMOTE

I1-12

3.2 Confirmation of jumper settings To confirm jumper settings of JP1 and JP6, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [ENT] key.

To confirm jumper settings of JP4 and JP5, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [HOOK] key.

3.3 Speaker and handset volume Speaker Adjust R18 with the VOLUME control on the front panel set at maximum for desired speaker volume. Handset Adjust R9 to select desired handset speaker volume.

REMOTE

I1-13

3.4 Connection 1. Connection to FS-5000/8000 The different modification is required depending on the suffix number of AF board. For suffix No.-22 and before The FS-5000/8000 radiotelephone outputs +18V for the RB-500 which operates on +12V. Therefore, reduce +18V to +12V by adding a resistor as shown below. Note that this modification is not required if the RB-500 is connected to the FS-5000/8000 via the DB-500.

Modification

Remove L4 on the MAIN board (05P0483) and install a resistor at the same place. Change system setting 9933 to “0”(MIF) on the FS-5000/8000. [STO] 9933 [ENT] “0”(MIF) [ENT] For suffix No.-33 and after The AF board having suffix No.-33 and after is delivered from August 1993. Note that when FS-5000/8000 is connected to DB-500 in RS-232C format, this modification is not required. C.Loop or RS-232C format can be selected by changing a jumper wire setting on the AF board having suffix No. –33 and after.

Breaker

L4

MAIN Board

Jumper wire Signal format short C.Loop open RS-232C

AF Board (05P0356-33)

REMOTE

I1-14

2. Connection to FS-1562, FS-1552, FS-1502 and FS-1503 For the FS-1562; The REMOTE-A (RS-232C) board on the TX/RX board is replaced with the REMOTE-B(C.Loop) board (05P0458: 005-517-500).

REMOTE A (RS-232C) board: 05P0457 005517480 REMOTE B (C.Loop) board : 05P0458 005517500

For the FS-1552 and FS-1502; Install the optional board: REMOTE-B (C.Loop). The REMOTE-B kit, consists of the REMOTE-B board and the connector assembly.

REMOTE A (RS-232C) Kit : OP05-39 005920310 REMOTE B (C.Loop) Kit : OP05-40 005920320

For the FS-1503; Install the optional board: REMOTE-B (C.Loop). The REMOTE-B kit, consists of the REMOTE-B board and the connector assembly.

REMOTE A (RS-232C) Kit : OP05-82 005939810 REMOTE B (C.Loop) Kit : OP05-83 005939820

Note) If more than two RB-500s are installed, connect them via the Distributor DB-500.

REMOTE

I1-15

4. DB-500 4.1 Connection There are two types of connections: MF/HF and VHF. MF/HF connection

VHF connection

Block diagram

REMOTE

I1-16

4.2 FS-5000/8000

REMOTE

I1-17

REMOTE

I1-18

4.3 RB-500/700 Connection Connect Remote Station RB-500 (RB-700) to the DB-500 as shown below. 1. When connecting two remote stations (Standard)

REMOTE

I1-19

2. When connecting three or four remote stations (Option)

REMOTE

I1-20

4.4 FS-1562 and DSC/DP Connection

REMOTE

I1-21

4.5 Interconnection diagrams 1. FS-5000/8000+DB-500+RB-500

When using current loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500. For AF board having suffix number-33 and after. 2.

REMOTE

I1-22

FS-1562+DB-500+RB-500

REMOTE

I1-23

3. FM-xxxx+DB-500+RB-700

REMOTE

I1-24

5. Jumper settings on MAIN Board

1. Connection

Section J1. NX-500

J1-1

10.8-40 VDCNMEA/CIF

AF IN

AF OUT

ALM BZ

ALM BZ

PRE-AMP Unit(NX-5)

Whip Antenna(1 m or 2.6 m)

NX-500

ANT

External Connector kit(Option)

SAR MSG.

Jumper wireRemove the jumper wire when an external unit (AF signal)is connected.

[EXT] Connector Plug pin number

1. NAV data in (R-H)

2. NAV data in (R-C)

3. 4. 5 NC

6. ALARM 1

7. ALARM 2

8. NAV RCV SIG OUT

9. NAV SIG IN (NAV COM)

10. 0V

NX-500

J1-2

2. Slide switch settings

Name of PCB Symbol Factory Setting Function

S1 NMEA [Data Format Selection] Format of input data should be selected; NMEA or CIF TB

S2 ACT [Preamp Selection] WIRE: Preamp Unit not installed ACT: Preamp Unit installed

TB Board

NX-500

J1-3

3. System settings

Note)

Categories A: Navigational warnings, B: Meteorological warnings, D: Search and

Rescue Information and L: Navigational warning additional to letter A note) cannot be

rejected from printout, in accordance with international regulations.

Note) Main CPU Ver 4.00 and after :from 2000/12.

NX-500

J1-4


FQ5-93-006 (93/02)

The service menu functions to change the specifications of the NX-500 to comply it

with the regulations of vessel’s country of registration. The settings should not be

changed without due reason.

NX-500

J1-5

NX-500

J1-6

5. Self test

Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ACCEPT] key.

NX-500

J1-7

NX-500

J1-8

6. S

tati

on

Lis

t

(Feb

. 199

9)

NX-500

J1-9

K1-1

AR-B1374

1. How to Quit Programs When updating the program of each terminal unit, quit the program, and then switch to the screen in which the PC-DOS prompt such as "A:¥-----" is displayed. The table below summarizes how to quit the terminal program for each terminal.

Changing to PCDOS Display How to confirm program version

Installation command

Terminal unit

B:¥>install DP-6

Main unit

[Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2] Note)With the version Ver-15 or earlier

[Fn]+[F2]

A:¥DP10¥ TERMINAL>

[F6]=>Self test B:¥>nbdpinst

[F1]=>nbdp.exe

FELCOM 11 [F1] =>[8] A:¥

FELCOM11> Confirm at

program starting B:¥>ibinst

FELCOM 12 [Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]=>YES=>[Enter] A:¥

FELCOM12> Ver03:

[Alt]+[Fn]=[F1] B:¥>ibinst

FELCOM 81 [Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]=>YES=>[Enter] A:¥> [Alt]+[Fn]=[F1] B:¥>ibinst For example, to quit the terminal program of FELCOM-12: - Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. - A message, "OK to quit system Yes/No", will appear. Then, move the cursor to "Y", and press [Enter] key. - Then, the prompt, "A:¥FELCOM12>", will appear on the screen. To update the terminal program, B-drive (B:¥>) is used. To change from A-drive to B drive, - press [B],[:], and [Enter] keys successively. Then, the prompt, "B:¥>", will appear on the screen. Type “installation command”, then press [Enter] key. (See above table; installation command.)

Section K1. IB-581

Note) Drives of IB-581 are: A drive : Flash ROMs of IB-581 B drive : Floppy disk

CPU card

K1-2

2. Changing the Terminal Software 2.1 Overview This chapter describes how to change the terminal software to use the IB-581 for other models. When changing IB-581 of DP-6 to the terminal of FELCOM-12, for example, you need to replace the terminal program. To replace the software, delete all the files except the system files of PC-DOS: IBMDOS.COM *, IBMBIO.COM *, COMMAND.COM, and FORMAT.COM, and install the program to be. 2.2 A method to change the terminal program by formatting A-drive Command “FORMAT A: /S” or A-drive format and copy of system files is used to format the A-drive. - Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[A],[: ],[Space],[/], and [S] keys successively. If you do not type “/S”, A: drive will be formatted all, this mean PC-DOS will be disappeared, never forget type “/S”. If you made format A: drive all or lost PC-DOS, see “chapter 3 Install PC-DOS”. For example) 1. Quit the terminal program of FELCOM-81.

- Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. Select “Yes” and press [Enter] key.

When the program has been quitted, the prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 2. To format the A-drive and copy the system files at the same time.

- Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[A],[:],[Space],[/],[S] and [Enter] keys successively.

Be sure to type a switch function "/S". This switch is a command to format the A-drive and copy the system files at the same time.

3. Check the root directory of A-drive. - Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively. COMMAND.COM Note) You cannot find "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM", because these are hidden files. 4. Change to the B-drive by pressing keys, - Press [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt "B:¥>" will appear on the screen.

IB-581

K1-3

5. Install the terminal program by using "INSTALL.BAT" file contained in the program. Press the keys successively according to the terminal to be changed to as follows: FELCOM-11 - [I],[B],[I],[N],[S],[T] and [Enter] FELCOM-12 - [I],[B],[I],[N],[S],[T] and [Enter] FELCOM-81 - [I],[N],[S],[T],[A],[L],[L] and [Enter] DP-6 - [I],[N],[S],[T],[A],[L],[L] and [Enter] Programs will be installed automatically. With some terminal programs, follow the installation instructions that will be shown on the display. 6. When the program has been installed, the prompt "B:¥>" will appear. Then turn off power.

IB-581

K1-4

3. Installing PC-DOS 3.1 Overview The system files and terminal program of PC-DOS 6.3 is installed in A-drive: flash ROMs (MEM-1, 2) on the CPU Card (AR-B1374) of IB-581. If the A-drive has been formatted or the system files have been destructed in an operational error, and PC-DOS, therefore, does not start, reinstall the PC-DOS system files, and then install the terminal program. 3.2 Outline of the Procedure

IB-581

Installing PC-DOS

Change BIOS settings.

Change FDD flat cable: A-drive.Change DIP SW of CPU Card: SW1- # 5, 6 on.

Set FD with System Files and FORMAT.COM in FDD.

Start up PC-DOS from FD.

Format C-drive and copy System Files. A:\>FORMAT C: /S

Power ON

Restore BIOS settings.

Restore: Change FDD flat cable: B-drive. Change DIP SW of CPU Card: SW1- # 5, 6 off.

Install Terminal Program.

Copy "FORMAT. COM" file. A:\>COPY FORMAT.COM B:

Backup system files of another IB-581. A:\>FORMAT B: /S

End

Note) You cannot find "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM of the system files by "DIR" command, because they are hidden files.

C-drive: Flash ROMs

Refer to page K1-7.

Refer to page K1-8.

Refer to page K1-10.

Refer to page K1-11.

Refer to page K1-1.

Backup PC-DOS

FD drive-A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 FD drive-B: not installed

FD drive-A: Not installFD drive-B: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2

Note) System Files: IBMDOS.COM IBMBIO.COM COMMAND.COM and FORMAT.COM

K1-5

3.3 Until PC-DOS Starts Major displays that appear until PC-DOS starts up are shown below. The displays depend on the version of CPU Card. The following displays are for Ver. 3.0 of CPU card.

ROM Drive Unit A =Drive :A ROM Disk Maximum =1536k RAM Drive Unit B =None RAM Disk Space =0000k ROM Memory Type =29C040A(512k ~8) Firmware Segment =C800H SRAM Memory Type =None Base Port Address =0210H SYSTEM Boot Drive =ROM/Flash Disk

Hit <F1> ,if you want to setup FLASH Disk

AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1995,American Megatrends Inc.,

Main Processor :i386SX Base Memory Size :640kBMath Processor :None Ext.Memory Size :128kBFloppy Drive A: :None Display Type :VGA/EGAFloppy Drive B: :1.44 MB 31/2 h Serial Port(s) :3F8,2F8AMIBIOS Date :07/15/95 Parallel Port(s) :378Processor Clock :33MHz

OR

AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1992,American Megatrends Inc., Main Processor :80386SX Base Memory Size :640kBNumeric Processor :None Ext.Memory Size :128kB Floppy Drive A: :None Hard Disk C:Type :NoneFloppy Drive B: :1.44 MB,31/2 h Hard Disk D:Type :NoneDisplay Type :VGA/PGA/EGA Serial Port(s) :3F8,2F8AMIBIOS Date :11/11/92 Parallel Port(s) :378

Starting PC DOS...

Power ON

CHIPS 65535 VGA 32kB BIOS Version 2.0.2 DECOMPILATION OR DISASSEMBLY PROHIBITED Copyright (c)1994 Chips and Technologes Inc,. All Rights Reserved

American Megatrends AMIBIOS (c) 1995 American Megatrends Inc,. (Ver 3.2 set-2)

Hit <DEL> , If you want to run SETUP

1024kB OK

WAIT...AR-B1374 SSD BIOS Version 3.1 (c)1997 Acrosser Technology Co,. LTD

CPU Cared Ver2.2 will appear.

CPU Card Ver-3.0 .

CPU Card Ver-2.2 .

Call to setup FLASH Disk menu. (See next page)

Starting terminal program

IB-581

K1-6

Note) Rewriting the memory If you press [F1] key when a message "Hit <F1>, if you want to setup FLASH Disk." appears before PC-DOS starts up after power-on, a memory settings display will appear. If you "Save" the settings by pressing [F4] key, the terminal program will be deleted and will not start. Then, a message "Boot Failure Insert BOOT diskette in A: Press any key when ready" will appear. In this case, it is necessary to PC-DOS system files and terminal program in A-drive. Explain to customer that you do not touch keyboard after the power switch ON until terminal software starting up completed.

Power ON

"Hit <F1>, if you want to setup FLASH Disk"

If press [F1] key, apper as follow.

If press [ESC] key, If press [F4] key,

FLASH type=29C040A(512k x 8) Total chip(s)=02 Disk size=1024 kbyte(s)ESC:Exit F4:Save :Select PgUp/PgDn:Modify

"Write to FLASH disk(Y/N)" will appear on the screen.

Press [N],[Enter] keys. If you press [Y],[Enter] key :

AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1995, American Megatrends Inc,.

Main Processor :i386SX Base Memory Size :640kBMath Processor :None Ext.Memory Size :128kBFloppy Drive A: ::None Display Type :VGA/EGAFloppy Drive B: :1.44MB 31/2 Serial Port(s) :3F8.2F8AMIBIOS Date :07/15/95 Parallele Port(s) :378Processor Clock :33MH

The displays depend upon CPU Card Version. (The above is for Ver. 3.0.)

Note) This is the memory configuration of IB-581. Do not change this.

note)

"Starting PC DOS..."

PC DOS will not starting.

If power is turned on, PC-DOS will not startkeeping the display below. "Boot Failure Insert BOOT diskette in A: Press any key when ready."

Starting terminal program

IB-581

K1-7

3.4 Backup the System Files (PC-DOS: Ver. 6.3) If A-drive (Flash ROMs) has been formatted or the system files have been destructed in an operational error, and PC-DOS, therefore, does not start, start the PC-DOS with the floppy disk that contains the system files. The necessary system files are as follows: IBMDOS.COM IBMBIO.COM COMMAND.COM FORMAT.COM (a file to be added) Note) "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM" are hidden files which you cannot find by using "DIR" command. The following procedure shows how to copy the system files and "FORMAT.COM" file from normally operating IB-581 to FD. Procedure 1. Quit the terminal program. For example, with NBDP terminal, - press [F2] key while pressing [Fn] and [Alt] keys. For how to quit each the terminal program, refer to "page K1-1". 2. Change to the root directory of A-drive. The prompt “A:¥>” will appear on the screen. If this prompt does not appear, - press keys, [C], [D], [Space], [¥], and [Enter], successively. Or, - press [C], [D], [.], [.] keys until the display "A:¥>" appears. 3. Insert the FD to write the system files into the FD drive. 4. To format the FD and copy the system files at the same time, - successively press keys [F], [O], [R], [M], [A], [T], [Space], [B], [:], [Space], [/], [S], and [Enter]. 5. Press keys according to the displayed operational instructions. “Insert new diskette for drive B: and press ENTER when ready..” - Press [Enter] key. “Checking existing disk format. Saving ---- Volume label (11characters,ENTER for none)?” - Press [Enter] key. “Volume Serial Number is 3C53-16D5 Format another(Y/N)?” - Press [N] and [Enter] keys successively. 6. After a prompt “A:¥>” appears on the screen, change to B-drive by pressing keys, - [B],[:], and [Enter], successively. And check the contents of the FD. - Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively. The "COMMAND.COM" file must be shown.

IB-581

K1-8

7. Change to A-drive by pressing keys, - [A],[:],and [Enter], successively. The "A:¥>" prompt will appear on the screen. 8. Next, to copy "FORMAT.COM" file,

- successively press keys [C], [O], [P], [Y], [Space], [F], [O], [R], [M], [A], [T], [.], [C], [O],[M], [Space], [B], [:], and [Enter].

9. Change to B-drive by pressing keys, - [B],[:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt "B:¥>" will appear on the screen. 10. By pressing keys - [D], [I], [R], and [Enter], confirm that the two files, "COMMAND.COM" and "FORMAT.COM", are shown in the contents of the FD. 3.5 Changing BIOS (Basic Input Output System) settings To start PC-DOS from FD, change BIOS settings as follows: Procedure 1. - Turn on power, and continue to press [DEL] key until a display in step 2 appears. Note) Or, with CPU Card Ver. 2.2, turn on power, and when a display "Hit <DEL>, If you want to run SETUP." appears, press [DEL] key. 2. The following display "AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES" will appear. The display depends upon the CPU Card Version.

3. Confirm that the cursor is on "STANDARD CMOS SETUP", - and press [Enter] key once or twice. (The cursor position can be shifted with [up] and [down] keys.)

AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES (c)1992 American Megatrends Inc.,All Rights Reserved

STANDARD CMOS SETUPP ADVANCED CMOS SETUP

AUTO CONGIGURATION WITH BIOS DEFAULTS AUTO CONFIGURATION WITH POWER-ON DEFAULTS

CHANGE PASSWORD AUTO DETECT HARD DISK HARD DISK UTILITY WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT DO NOT WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT

AMIBIOS SETUP - BIOS SETUP UTILITIES(c)1995 American Megatrends, Inc.All Rights Reserved

Standard CMOS SetupP Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup Change User Password Change Supervisor Password

Auto Configuration with Optimal SettingsAuto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings

Save Settings and Exit Exit Without Saving

(Version 2.2)(Version 3.0)

IB-581

K1-9

4. The following "STANDARD CMOS SETUP" menu will be displayed. The display depends upon the CPU Card Version.

5. Put the cursor on "Floppy Drive A:" with [up] and [down] keys, and change the contents

from "Not Installed" to "1.44 MB, 3 1/2" by pressing [up] or [down] key while pressing [Fn] key.

6. Similarly, put the cursor on "Floppy Drive B:" with [up] and [down] keys, and change

the contents from "1.44 MB, 3 1/2" to "Not Installed" by pressing [up] or [down] key while pressing [Fn] key.

7. Save the changed BIOS settings as follows: - With CPU Ver. 2.2, - press [Esc] and [F10] keys successively. Then, a display "Write to CMOS and Exit (Y/N)? N" will appear.

- So, press [Y] and [Enter] keys successively. - With CPU Ver. 3.0, A display "Save Current settings and exit (Y/N)? Y" will appear. - So, press [Enter] key. 8. After a display "AMIBIOS System Configuration" has appeared, PC-DOS will start. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time. "Current date is XX", - pressing key [Enter]. "Current Time is XX" , - pressing key [Enter]. 9. After turning off power, the BIOS settings have been changed.

AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM-BIOS SET UTILITIES (c)1992 American Megatrends Inc.,AllRites Reserved

Date(mn/date/year) :Mon,Sep,21 1998 Base Memory :640kB Time(hour/min/sec) :09:41:10 Ext.Memory :128kB Cyln Herd WPcom LZone Sect Size Hard Disk C:Type :Not Installed Hard Disk D:Type :Not Installed Floppy Drive A: :Not Installed Floppy Drive B: :1.44MB,31/2 Primary Display :VGA/PGA/EGA Keyboard :Installed

AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES (c)1995 American Megatrends, Inc.All Rights Reserved

Date(mm/dd/yyyy) :Thu Sep 24,1998Time(hh/mm/ss) :13:20:20

Floppy Drive A :Not InstalledFloppy Drive B :1.44 MB 31/2 LBA Blk PIO 32Bit Type Size Cyln Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode ModePri Master :Not InstalledPri Slave :Not Installed

Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled

calender

(Version 2.2) (Version 3.0)

IB-581

K1-10

3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector Change DIP SW of CPU Card and connector wiring for FD drive in the IB-581. Changing DIP SW of CPU Card Remove the casing of IB-581, and turn on DIP SW "#5" and "#6" of CPU Card. DIP SW "#8" is already on.

Changing Internal Connector Change the connection of the flat cable connected between the CPU Card and the FD drive at FD side. This connector change switches the FD drive from B-drive to A-drive.

FD DRIVE

POWER PACK

CPU CARD

VGA CARD

FIL

SIMM

DIP SWON

# 5, # 6 ONnote)DIP SW "8" is already on.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FD DRIVE

POWER PACK

CPU CARD

VGA CARD

FIL

SIMM

Connect this connector to FD drive.

Originally connected connector

Note) Be cautions about the connector inserting direction.

A Drive5inch FDD

5inch FDD

3.5inch FDD

3.5inch FDD

B Drive

IB-581

K1-11

3.7 Installing System Files After preparing the FD that contains the system files backuped in page K1-7 (including "FORMAT.COM" file), changing BIOS settings, DIP SW of CPU Card, and the internal connector, write the system files in the Flash ROMs as follows. 1. Set the FD containing the system files (including "FORMAT.COM" file) in the FD drive. 2. - Turn on power, and continue to press [ESC] key.

Continue to press [ESC] key until a display "Starting PC DOS..." appears. Then, PC- DOS will start from the FD system files.

3. Continue to operate according to the displayed operational instructions. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time. "Current date is XX", - Pressing key [Enter]. "Current Time is XX" , - Pressing key [Enter]. 4. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 5. To format the C-drive(Flash ROMs) and copy the system files at the same time. (See note)

- Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[C],[:],[Space],[/],[S],[Enter] keys succssively. Note) The drive name of the Flash ROMs disk depends upon whether PC-DOS is installed in the Flash ROMs disk, or not. The name is "A-drive" if PC-DOS is installed, and "C-drive" if not. 6. A display "Insert new diskette for C-drive and press ENTER when ready..." will appear. - Then, press [Enter] key. 7. Continue to operate according to the displayed operational instructions. “Proceed with Format(Y/N) ?” - Press [Y],[Enter] keys. “Volume label (11 characters, ENTER for none)?” - Press [Enter] key. “Format another (Y/N) ?” - Press [N],[Enter] keys.

IB-581

K1-12

8. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 9. Check to be sure that the system file have been written in the Flash ROMs(C-drive). - Change to the C-drive by pressing keys [C],[:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt "C:¥>" will appear on the screen. 10. Press keys [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] successively to confirm that "COMMAND.COM" files are included in C-drive. 11. Once turn off power, and restore the changed items to their original settings, referring

to the procedures described in "page K1-8 3.5 Changing BIOS settings" and "page K1-10 3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector".

BIOS settings - Floppy Drive A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 Restore to "Not installed". - Floppy Drive B: Not installed Restore to "1.44 MB, 3 1/2". Changing DIP SW settings and the connector connection - # 5, # 6 ON Restore to "# 5, # 6 OFF". Restore the connection of FD drive connector. - A Drive Restore to "B-drive". 12. Turn on power, and continue to operate according to the operational instructions

displayed. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time.

"Current date is XX", - Pressing key [Enter]. "Current Time is XX" , - Pressing key [Enter]. 13. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 14. Press keys [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] successively to confirm that "COMMAND.COM" files are included in A-drive. 15. Install the terminal software according to "page K1-1".

IB-581

K1-13

4. How to erase password In BIOS setting, entry of a password may be requested. (The password is set through “Change User Password” and/or “Change Supervisor Password.” If so, erase the password by following the steps below. 1. Remove the CPU card with all connectors connected. 2. Turn on the unit. Be careful not to short on the CPU card. 3. Short between leads of C17 at the soldering side of the CPU card. (Any change is observed on the screen.)

4. Turn off the unit. 5. Fix the CPU card. 6. Turn on the unit and confirm the BIOS Settings.

IB-581

[C17] Land

IC

IC IC

IC

IC

K1-14

AR-B1378-F2 (New type CPU card)

5. AR-B1378-F2 The CPU card AR-B1374 used in the terminal unit IB-581, HSD Modem IB-680/681, and NBDP DP-6 is no longer produced. The new card is compatible with old one when it is used for IB-680/681 and DP-6. For IB-581, replace the old card and T. BOARD with new ones at a time. The code number and type of new T. BOARD are;

Type:16P0167 Code No.: 004-444-100 The type of new CPU card is listed below.

Model New CPU

Card Code No. Specification

Compatibility with old card

IB-581 AR-B1378 F2 004444070 With VGA No IB-680 AR-B1378 FH 004442980 Without VGA Yes IB-681 AR-B1378 FH 004442980 Without VGA Yes DP-6 AR-B1378 FC 005939230 Without VGA Yes

Factory-modified sets (approximately)

Model Serial No. Production

FELCOM 12 7976 and after DP-6 7658 and after

In April 1999 IB-581

FELCOM 81 Not decided yet

The differences between new and old CPU cards used for the IB-581 are;

Old New Type Identification Type Identification

CPU Card AR-B1374 With VGA board piggyback-mounted

AR-B1378 F2 Single board

T. BOARD 16P0141 Less parts 16P0167 More parts

IB-581

CPU card

K1-15

5.1 How to install PC-DOS

IB-581

K1-16

5.2 Changing BIOS settings

IB-581

K1-17

IB-581

Section K2. IB-582

K2-1

This chapter mainly describes about the CPU card in the terminal unit IB-582. The CPU card is NOVA-300-M2-FO/DOS embedded 386SX SBC of which CPU is ALI6117 (includes 386SX CPU).

1. DOS installation When the message “Non-system disk or disk error Press a key to reboot” appears, DOS must be installed by using the procedure below. Note: 1) On IB-582, drive A is floppy disk and drive C is flash ROM. 2) Use DOS program being copied from other IB-582 only.

1.1 How to copy DOS program

To copy DOS program from the IB-582 which works normally; 1. Press [F2] while pressing and holding down [Fn] and [Alt] simultaneously to terminate the

Inmarsat-B system program. 2. Select drive C. (Make sure that prompt C:\ on the screen.) 3. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive. 4. Type FORMART A:/S, followed by [Enter] key. The disk is formatted and system file is

copied onto the disk. 5. Type COPY FORMAT.COM A:, followed by [Enter] key. The FORMAT.COM file is

copied onto the disk. 6. Type A: and press [Enter] key to change the drive from C to A. 7. Type DIR, followed by [Enter] key. The following file names are displayed.

COMMAND.COM FORMAT.COM

IB-582

K2-2

1.2 DOS installation

To install DOS; 1. Turn on the unit while pressing and holding down [DEL] key.

When the prompt “Enter CURRENT Password:” appears, refer to 2. Erasing password. 2. Keep [DEL] key holding down until the AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY menu is

displayed.

AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY – VERSION 1.16 (C)1996 American Megatrends, Inc. All Right Reserved

Standard CMOS Setup

Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup

Power Management Setup Peripheral Setup

Auto-Detect Hard Disks Change User Password

Change Supervisor Password

Change Language Setting Auto Configuration with Optional Settings Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings

Save Settings and Exit Exit Without Saving

Standard CMOS setup for Changing time, date, harddisk type, etc ESC: Exit ||: Sel F2/F3:Color F10:Save & Exit

3. Select “Advanced CMOS Setup” and press [Enter] key. 4. Press the up or down arrow key while pressing and holding down [Fn] key to change the

setting as below. 1. Quick Boot: from Enabled to Disabled. 2. Boot UP Sequence: from C:, A:, CDROM to A:, C:, CDROM.

5. To save the procedure, press [Esc] and [F10] in this order. “Save Current setting and exit (Y/N)? Y” is displayed.

6. Press [Enter] key. 7. Make sure that “Non-System disk or disk error Press a key to reboot” is displayed. 8. Insert the floppy disk which stores DOS program into the drive.

IB-582

K2-3

9. Follow the instruction message on the screen until A:\> appears. If you accept the displayed

data, press [Enter] key.

Current data is Sat x –xx-xxxx Enter new data (mm-dd-yyyy): Current time is xx:xx:xx.xx Enter new time: Datalight ROM^DOS Version 6.22 Copyright © 1989-1999 Datalight, Inc. A:\>

10. To copy files on the floppy disk (drive A) to the flash ROM (drive C), type FORMAT C:/S,

followed by [Enter] key. 11. Press [Y], followed by [Enter] key while the message below is on the screen.

Warning ! All data on hard disk drive C: will be lost !!

Are you SURE you want to format this drive (Y/N) ? Y

12. Wait until the format is completed. 13. Change the drive from A to C. (Type C:, followed by [Enter].) 14. Type DIR, followed by [Enter] key to make sure that COMMAND.COM file exists in the

flash ROM. 15. Change the drive from C to A. 16. Type COPY FORMAT.COM C:, followed by [Enter] key to copy the file to the flash

ROM. 17. Change the drive from A to C and type DIR, followed by [Enter] key to make sure that the

flash ROM has COMMAND.COM and FORMAT.COM files. 18. Remove the floppy disk and insert the floppy disk having FELCOM 82 terminal software. 19. Change the drive to A. 20. Type INSTALL, followed by [Enter] key. 21. After the program is installed, turn off the unit and remove the disk. 22. Follow steps 1 to 3 above and change the settings as below.

(1) Quick Boot: from Disabled to Enabled (2) Boot UP Sequence: from A:, C:, CDROM to C:, A:, CDROM.

IB-582

K2-4

2. Erasing password If someone sets Supervisor Password and forgot it, AMI BIOS setup program cannot run. (Supervisor Password setting is unnecessary for IB-582.) In this case, clearing CMOS setup must be carried out. To do so; Note; After clearing CMOS setup, BIOS setup must be made.

1. Turn off the unit. 2. Change jumper setting JP31 from #2-#3 to #3-#4. 3. Wait for 5 seconds. 4. Change jumper setting JP31 from #3-#4 to #2-#3. 5. Turn on the unit while pressing and holding down [DEL] key. 6. Release [DEL] key when the following message comes on.

CMOS Checksum Bad RUN SETUP Press F1 to Resume

7. Press [F1] key to call AMI BIOS setup menu. 8. Referring to 3. BIOS default, change settings on the following setup menus.

- Standard CMOS Setup - Advanced COMS Setup - Advanced Chipset Setup - Power Management Setup - Peripheral Setup

9. Select “Save Settings and Exit” in the AMI BIOS setup menu.

IB-582

K2-5

3. BIOS default BIOS defaults of the CPU card are;

Standard CMOS Setup

Advanced CMOS Setup

IB-582

K2-6

Advanced Chipset Setup

Power Management Setup

IRQ 03 Event (CM2) Disable | | IRQ 15 Event (Reserved) Disable Monitor HDD Disable Monitor VGA Disable

IB-582

K2-7

Peripheral Setup

IB-582

K2-8

4. Layout and hardware settings The figure below shows the location of the major parts on the CPU card and the location of the jumper blocks.

CN

18(K

eybo

ard)

CN

17(S

eria

l Por

t)

CN

14(S

eria

l Por

t)

CN10C

N21

CN

15

CN4(IDE Port)CN20(LCD)CN1(Serial Port)

CN2(Serial Port)

CN

16(M

ouse

)CN

12(P

aral

lel P

ort)

CN9

CN6

CN8

CN

3(S

peak

er)

CN7

M6117C

BAT

TC

R1/

2AA

BZ

Disk on chip(F-ROM) C Drive

RAM(1M)424260-60

RAM(1M)424260-60

AMIBIOS386SX

FDC37C669

W83877TF

CN5(FDD)JP9JP29JP10JP24

JP25

JP26

JP8

JP16

JP20

JP21

JP18

JP19

JP31

JP3

JP23

CN11

-12V +12V +5VNOVA-300 V1.1

HM86508 IQ

SIM

M

(IrDA Port)

(Reset button)

(Power LED & keylock)

(IDE LED)

(Ext

erna

l Pow

er)

(LED1)

JP1/2

Includes 386SX CPU

LCD/CRTController

1 4

(RAM Clear)

POWER LED Always on

IB-582

K2-8

AP1. Cable specifications

1.1 Cable Specifications

Appendix

AP1-1

Appendix

AP1-2

Appendix

AP1-3

Appendix

AP1-4

Appendix

AP1-5

Appendix

AP1-6

1.2 How to calculate voltage drop in power cable

The unit is designed to work from specified power supply voltage +/-10 %. The

resistance at power supply connector and terminal can not be neglected in the

equipment. The power cable must be selected properly so that voltage drop is 3 to 5 %.

The maximum current in the power cable must be used for the calculation. In the

following examples, how to select the cable gauge is explained.

* Voltage drop in cable e=(K x I x r x L) / 1000

* Cable length L=(1000 x e ) / (K x I x r)

K=coefficient (single phase and DC: 2 three phases : / 3 )

I=current (A)

r=resistance : ohm/km

L=cable length (m)

Example)

* FM-8500

I=Tx current : 7 A e=0.72 V Cable drop : 3 %

r=DPYC-5.5sq : 3.36 ohm/km K=2

L=(1000 x 0.72) / (2 x 7 x 3.36)

=15.3 m

* Battery cable

I=Current : 50 A e=1.2 V Cable drop : 5 %

r=DPYC-38sq : 0.483 ohm/km K=2

L=(1000 x 1.2) / (2 x 50 x 0.483)

=24.8 m

* PR-850A AC cable (AC 220 V single phase line)

I=Current : 7 A e=11 V Cable drop : 5 %

r=DPYC-8 sq : 2.33 ohm/km K=2

L=(1000 x 11) / (2 x 7 x 2.33)

=337 m

Appendix

AP1-7

K=2 (single phase and DC)

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

10

20

30

40 m

0

5A 10A 15A 20A

5.5sq = 3.36 ohm/km

Voltage drop in cable

Cable length

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

10

20

30

40 m

0

5A 10A 15A 20A 30A 40A

14 sq = 1.31 ohm/km


Cable length

Appendix

AP1-8

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

10

20

30

40 m

0

5A10A

15A20A

30A

40A

60A

22 sq = 0.859 ohm/km


Cable length

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

10

20

30

40 m

0

10A 20A 30A40A 60A

120A

50A

38 sq = 0.483 ohm/km


Cable length

Appendix

AP1-9

1.3 Coaxial Cable Specifications

Appendix

AP1-10

Type of Coaxial cable and loss in 1600 MHz

Loss (dB) Type

10m 20m 30m 40m 50m 60m 70m 80m 90m 100m

3D-2V 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80

5D-2V 4.4 8.8 13.2 17.6 22 26.4 30.8 35.2 39.6 44

8D-2V 3.3 6.6 9.9 13.2 16.5 19.8 23.1 26.4 29.7 33

10D-2V 2.7 5.4 8.1 10.8 13.5 16.2 18.9 21.6 24.3 27

5D-FB 2.6 5.2 7.8 10.5 13 15.6 18.2 20.8 23.4 26

8D-FB 1.8 3.6 5.4 7.2 9 10.8 12.6 14.4 16.2 18

10D-FB 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5 15

RG-174/U 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

RG-58A/U 7.9 15.8 23.7 31.6 39.5 47.4 55.3 63.2 71.1 79

RG-213/U 3.9 7.8 11.7 15.6 19.5 23.4 27.3 31.2 35.1 39

RG-55A/U 6.1 12.2 18.3 24.4 30.5 36.6 42.7 48.8 54.9 61

RG-5B/U 4.4 8.8 13.2 17.6 22 26.4 30.8 35.2 39.6 44

RG-214/U 3.7 7.4 11.1 14.8 18.5 22.2 25.9 29.6 33.3 37

RG-217/U 2.9 5.8 8.7 11.6 14.5 17.4 20.3 23.2 26.1 29

RG-222/U 19 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190

Appendix

AP1-11

1.4 How to attach the antenna cable connector 1. N-P 5DFB/8DFB

Appendix

AP1-12

2. N-P 12DSFA

Appendix

AP1-13

1.5 Installation of Pre-amp unit and coaxial cable 1. Mounting of Antenna (FAX-5, 2.6 m whip antenna)

Fix the FAX-5 (pre-amp unit) to the mounting mast (35-90 mm) with hose clamps.

Screw the whip antenna into the FAX-5. Coat connection point with putty to

waterproof.

2. Switching to coaxial cable with armor

To switch to coaxial cable with armor (RG-10/UY);

1. Attach a coaxial connector (MP-3) about 40-60 cm from the bottom of the FAX-5.

2. Remove 15-25 cm of the sheath of the cable RG-l0/UY and attach connector MP-7 to

the cable.

3. Attach relay connector M-A-JJ between connectors MP-3 and MP-7.

4. Cover connectors with self-vulcanizing tape followed by vinyl tape to waterproof.

Appendix

AP2-1

AP2. Power consumption 2.1 Power consumption list

Power consumption Current Drain Equipment Model

Tx (W) Rx (W) Tx (A) Rx (A) Note

AC:4.8kVA DC:2.8kW Max.

120A (SSB peak) 3A 24V DC

FS-8000 36A 3A 24V DC

(AC fail) AC:2.4kVA DC1.4kW Max.


FS-5000 26A 3A 24V DC

(AC fail) AC:1.9kVA DC:1.1kW Max.


FS-2500 26A 3A 24V DC

(AC fail) FS-1562-15 20A 2A 24V DC

40A 2A 24V DC FS-1562-25 25A 2A 24V DC

(AC fail) FS-75 20A 2A 24V DC

40A 2A 24V DC

MF/HF RT

FS-2550 25A 2A 24V DC (AC fail)

FM-7000 6.0A 0.5A 12V DC FM-7500 10A 2.1A 24V DC FM-8000 +DSC-8V 5.5A 0.9A 24V DC FM-8500 150W 10W 6.3A 0.4A 24V DC

VHF RT

FM-8700 170W 25W 7.1A 1.0A 24V DC DSC-5 15W 0.6A 24V DC

DSC-5A 15W 0.6A 24V DC DSC-6 15W 0.6A 24V DC

DSC-6A 15W 0.6A 24V DC MF/HF DSC

DSC-60 24W 1.0A 24V DC DSC-5 15W 0.6A 24V DC

DSC-5V 15W 0.6A 24V DC DSC-8V Connected with FM-800 15V DC VHF DSC

DSC-8VP 15W 0.6A 24V DC DMC DMC-5 10W 0.4A 24V DC

RB-500 12W 1A Remote station RB-700 12W 1A 12V DC

Distributor DB-500 3A 24V DC MF/HF WR AA-50 10W 0.4A 24V DC

Appendix

AP2-2

Power

consumption Current Drain Equipment Model Tx (W) Rx (W) Tx (A) Rx (A)

Note

DP-5 40W 1.7A 24V DC 20W 0.8A 24V DC

(DP-6) NBDP DP-6 18W 0.8A 24V DC

(IB-581) 144W 24W 6A 1A 24V DC

(IC-100/200) FELCOM 10 41W 1.7A 24V DC

(IC-500) 200W 30W 8.3A 1.2A 24V DC

(IC-111/211) 41W Max. 1.7A Max. 24V DC

(IC-511) FELCOM 11

18W 0.7A 24V DC (IB-518)

120W 25W 5A 1A 24V DC (IC-112/212)

INMARSAT C

FELCOM 12 18W 0.7A 24V DC

(IB-581) PP-500 33VA 100/220V AC Printer PP-510 36W 1.5A 24V DC

FELCOM 80 400VA Max. 100/220V AC IB-680 100VAC:0.3

220VAC:0.2 100/220V AC

270W Max. 11.2A Max. 24V DC (Class 1) FELCOM 81

254W Max. 10.6A 24V DC (Class 2)

INMARSAT B

IB-681 100VAC:0.3 220VAC:0.2 100/220V AC

FAX PFX-50 50W 100V AC NAVTEX NX-500 15W 0.6A 24V DC

EGC EGC-5 2.1A 24V DC EGC Printer PP-505 15W 0.6A 24V DC

FT-1208 20A 3A FT-808 20A 3A FT-508 20A 3A FT-258 20A 3A

Transmitter

FT-158 20A 3A

24V DC (Output power

more than 60W)

RV- 118G/128G 3A 24V DC Receiver RV-117G 1.3A 24V DC

EMG lamp 24V 20W lamp 0.8A 24V DC

Appendix

AP2-3

2.2 Reserve Sources of Energy (By class NK) 1. The capacity of the reserve source of energy is to be determined in accordance with

the following formula with specified load conditions to the required radio installations fed from the reserve sources.

C=K x I where C: Required capacity (AH) K: Capacity conversion factor (H) (corresponding to ambient temperature of +50C and end voltage of 1.8 V) I : Total consumption current (A) 2. The capacity conversion factor K is to be determined in accordance with the following:

(1) For lead accumulator batteries of a clud or pasted vent type, K = 3.2 in the case of a 1 hour discharging rate and K = 7.2 in the case of a 6 hour discharging rates, respectively. For lead accumulator batteries of a sealed type, K= 2.0 and K= 7.1 in the case of 1 hour and 6 hour discharging rates, respectively.

(2) For lead accumulator batteries of other types and alkali accumulator batteries, K may be determined by referring to the value recommended by the manufacturer.

Appendix

AP2-4

2.3 Sample of Battery calculation table

Appendix

AP2-5

2.4 Specifications of Rectifier and Battery charger PR-850A 1. GENERAL (1) Rated Input Voltage 100/110/120/200/220/240 VAC +/-10% (2) Input Frequency 50/60 Hz (3) Input Current 15A or less (Input :100V AC / Output 30A) 30A or less (Input :100V AC / Output 60A)

(4) Rated Output Voltage 24VDC +/-10% (with rated Output Current 30 to 60A)

(5) Rated Output Current 30A continuous (6) Peak Output Current 60A output within 1mim. (Input AC) 40A output within 1mim. (Input DC)

(7) Ripple Voltage 200 m Vp-p or less (Load :0 to 30A) (8) Insulation Resistance 500VDC 10M ohms or more between AC

input and chassis 2. Environmental Condition (1) Ambient Temperature -20 OC to +55 OC (2) Relative Humidity 95 % max. PR-300 1. GENERAL (1) Rated Input Voltage 100/110/200/220 VAC +/-10% (2) Input Frequency 47 to 63 Hz (3) Input Current 4.1A or less (Input 100V AC / Output 7.5A) (4) Rush Current 80A or less (5) Rated Output Voltage 24VDC +/- 3% (with rated output current 7.5A)

(6) Rated Output Current 7.5A (7) Peak Output Current 20A

(with rated output current :15A 250msec, duty 50%)

Appendix

AP2-6

(8) Ripple Voltage 100 mVp-p or less (9) Insulation Resistance 500VDC 50M ohms or more between AC

input and chassis 2. Environmental Condition (1) Ambient Temperature -20 OC to +55 OC (2) Relative Humidity 95 % max. BC-6158 : Battery charger 1. Applicable Battery 200AH Normal Ship Battery 2. Power Supply 100/110/200/220VAC, single phase,

50/60Hz, l.5kVA max. 3. Output for battery 28VDC, 30A (full charging) 4. Charge/discharge Meter Provided on the radio console panel 5. Control Panel Provided on the radio console panel 6. Environmental Conditions Ambient Temperature -20 OC to +55 OC Relative Humidity 95% max. at +40 OC

Appendix

AP3-1

AP3. NMEA 3.1 List of NMEA sentences

Equipment Model Receiving sentences Note FS-5000 MF/HF RT FS-8000 GLL RMA RMC ZDA GGA(Ver21) CIF or NMEA

FM-7500 GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA

FM-8500 GLL RMA RMC ZDA(Ver03) GGA(Ver10) NMEA VHF RT

FM-8700 GLL RMC ZDA RMA(Ver04) GGA(Ver04) NMEA

DSC-5/5A GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA DSC-6/6A GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA MF/HF DSC

DSC-60 GGA RMA RMC GLL ZDA NMEA DSC-5/5V GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA VHF DSC DSC-8V/8VP GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA

DP-5 GLL RMA RMC VTG DBT MTW VHW TRF CIF or NMEA

NBDP DP-6 GLL RMA RMC VTG DBT

MTW VHW TRF ZDA(Ver17) NMEA

FELCOM 10 GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL CIF or NMEA GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL MTW DBT VDR NMEA FELCOM 11 GLL GGA VTG RMC ZDA OUT:GB-92 GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL MTW DBT VDR BWC(Ver06) BWR(Ver06)

NMEA INMARSAT C

FELCOM 12

GGA ZDA GLL VTG RMC GSV OUT:GN-74/77/78

FELCOM 80 GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL ZDA CIF or NMEA

INMARSAT B FELCOM 81 GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL

ZDA NMEA

EGC EGC-5 GLL WPL RMA RMB RMC CIF or NMEA

NAVTEX NX-500 ZZU ZLZ ZDA GLL VTG MTW HDP DBS DBT DBK VWT VWR VCD VDR

CIF or NMEA

Priority of talkers) GP>LC>DE>LA>TR>II Priority of sentences)

Position GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL Speed VTG>RMC>RMA HDG (Magnetic) HDG (>HDM>HCC) HDG (True) HDT>RMC>RMA>VTG Depth of water DPT>DBT

Appendix

AP3-2

EX) NMEA data connection

Case-1

Case-2

GPS

ReciverMD-500

FM-8500

FM-8500

Distributor

(05P0606) DP-6

FELCOM-12

DSC-60RC-1500

NMEANMEA

NMEA OUT

NMEA OUT

MD-500Distributor(05P0606) DP-6

FELCOM-12

DSC-60RC-1500

NMEA

NMEA

(GPS Reciver)

FM-8500

FM-8500

Appendix

AP3-3

3.2 Sentences formatters 1. NMEA-0183-Ver2.0

Ver1

.5

Ver2

.0:+

UTC

Appendix

AP3-4

Appendix

AP3-5

Appendix

AP3-6

2. IEC 1162-1

Appendix

AP3-7

Appendix

AP4-1

AP4. Program ROM 4.1 Communication Equipment ROM List

Model PCB type ROM Version No. ROM type Note AA-

50/50R 05P0514

(CONTROL) U4 05-501-45-1xx M27C256B-10F1 CONTROL

05-501-48-140 05P0407A (CONTROL) 05-501-48-141 M27C4001-10F1

For Old type LCD(yellow)

Full parts Note) DMC-5

05P0407E (CONTROL)

U8 05-501-48-143

and after M27C4001-10F1 For new LCD type (green) Reject parts

05P0407 -none

(CONTROL) 05-501-39-141 M27C4001-10F1


Full parts

05P0407D (CONTROL)

U8 05-501-39-142


U2 05-501-40-1xx

Note) DSC-

5/5A/5R 5AR/5V

05P0370A (MODEM) U3 05-501-40-2xx WS57C49C-45D MODEM

05-501-68-102 05P0407C (CONTROL) 05-501-68-103 M27C4001-10F1


Full parts

05P0407G (CONTROL)

U8 05-501-68-105


U2 05-501-40-1xx

Note) DSC-6/6A


05-501-67-102 05P0407B 05-501-67-103 M27C4001-10F1


Full parts

05P0407F

U8 05-501-67-104


U2 05-501-40-1xx

Note) DSC-

8V/8VP


U4 05-502-01-1xx FD

U4:MBM29F800TA-70PFTN (Flash ROM)

MAIN (Update from FD) DSC-60

(FD:both for DSC

and MODEM)

05P0702 (CONTRL)

U11 05-502-02-1xx FD

U11:MBM29F400BC- 90PFTNFK (Flash ROM)

MODEM (Update from FD)

Note) Refer to section “4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed”.

Appendix

AP4-2

Model PCB type ROM Version No. ROM type Note

U41 05-501-38-1xx U42 05-501-38-2xx 05P0386

(CONTROL) U43 05-501-38-3xx

M5M27C100k-15 Terminal

U2 05-501-33-1xx DP-5

05P0370 (MODEM) U3 05-501-33-2xx WS57C49C-45D MODEM

U2 05-501-33-1xx

U3 05-501-33-2xx

MODEM (DP-5/6:Ver14 and

before) U2 05-501-96-1xx

05P0370 (MODEM)

U3 05-501-96-2xx

WS57C49C-45D MODEM (DP-6:Ver17 and

after) AR-

B1378FC or

AR-B1374 (CPU)

F- ROM 05-501-87-1xx MAIN

(DP-6/10)

DP-6

IB-581 --- 05-501-89-1xx

FD (both for terminal and main unit)

Terminal U2 05-501-96-1xx 05P0370

(MODEM) U3 05-501-96-2xx WS57C49C-45D MODEM (DP-6/10)

AR- B1378FC

or AR-B1374

(CPU)

F- ROM 05-501-87-1xx MAIN

(DP-6/10) DP-10

PC --- 05-501-88-1xx

FD

Terminal

Appendix

AP4-3


05P0373 (PANEL) U1 05-501-29-1xx HD63B01Y0RDS7P

(Mask ROM) Main CPU

(05S9131-0) FM-7000 05P0377 (SUB-CPU) U1 05-501-30-1xx HD63B01Y0RDS8P

(Mask ROM) Sub CPU

(05S9132-0) 05P0373 (PANEL) U1 05-501-29-1xx HD63B01Y0RDS7P

(Mask ROM) Main CPU

(05S9131-0) 05P0377 (SUB-CPU) U1 05-501-30-1xx HD63B01Y0RDS8P

(Mask ROM) Sub CPU

(05S9132-0)

05P0407 -none

(CONTROL) 05-501-39-141 M27C4001-10F1

DSC CONTROL For Old type LCD(yellow)

Full parts

05P0407D (CONTROL)

U8

05-501-39-142 and after M27C4001-10F1

DSC CONTROL For new LCD type (green) Reject parts

U2 05-501-40-1xx

Note) FM-7500

05P0370A (MODEM) U3 05-501-40-2xx WS57C49C-45D DSC MODEM

FM-8000 05P0575 (CPU) U6 05-501-66-1xx HD6475328CP-10 Control

U2 05-501-83-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT FM-8500 05P0616 (CONTROL) U4 05-501-82-1xx M27C4001-10F1 DSC

U2 05-501-93-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT FM-8700 05P0616A (CONTROL) U4 05-501-92-1xx M27C4001-10F1 DSC 05P0714

(CONT) U2 05-502-03-1xx AT28C64B-15TC RT FM-2721

(FD:both for RT and HS) 05P0716

(HS C0NT) U2 05-502-04-1xx HD64F3067RF20 HS-2721 (Hand set)

Note) Refer to section “4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed”.

Appendix

AP4-4


05P0355 (CPU:5000C) U9 05-501-31-1xx M5M27C100k-15 05P0347

(CPU:5000T) U10 05-501-31-1xx M5M27C100k-15 Controller &

Transceiver CPU

05P0358-33 and

before U3 05-501-32-1xx M27C256B-10F1

FS-2500/ 5000/8000

05P0358-44 and after

U1 05-501-54-1xx HD6475328CP

AT-5000

05-501-57-1xx RT

05P0456A (CPU) U6

05-501-57-106A HD6475328CP-10

RT: for maintenance ROM, PCB Ver 05P0526-33 (T/Rx PCB) and before

FS-1562- 15/25

05P0528 (COUP) U1 05-501-61-1xx HD6475328CP-10 AT-1560-15/25

05-501-58-1xx RT

05P0456B (CPU) U6

05-501-58-106A HD6475328CP–10

RT: for maintenance ROM, PCB Ver 05P0526-33 (T/Rx PCB) and before

FS-75

05P0528 (COUP) U1 05-501-61-1xx HD6475328CP-10 AT-1560-15/25

FT-158 05P0425 (CPU) U9 05-501-41-1xx M5M27C100k-15 CONTROL

FT- 208/508/808

05P0418 (CPU) U9 05-501-41-1xx M5M27C100k-15 FX-3058

Exciter unit RC-

208/508/808 05P0442

(CPU) U2 05-501-43-1xx M5M27C100-k-15 CU-5521 controller unit

05P0665 (CPU) U6 05-501-91-1xx HD6475328F10 RT

FS-1503 05P0669 (COUP) U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P AT-1503

(05S0522-0) 05P456

(CPU) U6 05-501-44-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT FS-1502 05P0278B

(COUP) U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P AT-1502 (05S0522-0)

05P0271 (CPU) U1 05-501-25-1xx HD63B01YORCQ1P

(Mask) RT

(05S0955-0) FS-1550 05P0278


05P0456D (CPU) U6 05-501-69-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT

FS-1552 05P0278 (COUP) U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P AT-1500

(05S0522-0)

Appendix

AP4-5


05P0271 (CPU) U1 05-501-20-1xx HD637B01YOP

(Mask) RT FS-1501

05P0278 (COUP) U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P AT-1500

(05S0522-0) 05P0271

(CPU) U1 05-501-20-1xx HD637B01YOP (Mask) RT

FS-1500 05P0278


05-501-47-1xx CONTROL

For FS series SSB RT RB-500 05P0483

(MAIN) U2

05-501-60-1xx

M5M27C100K-15 CONTROL For RC-508

series console RB-700 05P0483A

(MAIN) U2 05-501-46-1xx M5M27C100K-15 CONTROL

IF-8500 05P0640 (CPU) U1 05-501-86-1xx HD647180X0FS8L CONTROL

08P3151 (MAIN) U8 08-501-50-1xx HD63B01YOREBOP Mask ROM

(08S0247-1) NX-500 08P3119A

(NAVTEX) U2 08-501-51-1xx HD63B01YOREJ4P Mask ROM (08S0248-1)

05P0258 (CONT) U8 05-501-18-1xx M27C512-10F1 CONTROL RV-

128G/118G 05P0261 (I/F) U3 05-501-19-1xx MBM27C64-30 I/F

Appendix

AP4-6


U37 16-500-50-1xx CPU 1 16P0049 (MAIN CPU) U41 16-500-51-1xx CPU 2 16P0052

(PANEL CPU) U5 16-500-52-1xx MBM27C1000-15Z-G

PANEL CPU U18 16-500-49-1xx

EGC-5

16P0034 (DEMOD) U21 16-500-49-2xx 27CX321-45 DEMOD

U52 16-500-40-1xx MBM27C1000-15Z-G CPU 1 16P0043-33 and after

(CPU) U1 16-500-41-1xx M5M27C401AK-15 CPU 2 (4M ROM)

16P0043 (CPU) U1 16-500-41-1xx MBM27C1000-15Z-G CPU2

(1M ROM) U18 16-500-42-1xx 16P0034

(DEMOD) U27 16-500-42-2xx 27CX321-45 DEMOD

U41 16-500-39-1xx U42 16-500-39-2xx 05P0386

(CONTROL) U43 16-500-39-3xx

MBM27C1000-20/25 Terminal (For IC-500)

FELCOM 10

Soft for PC --- 16-500-38-0xx FD Terminal U6 16-500-86-1xx MBM27C1000A-15Z CPU 1 U18 16-500-87-1xx M5M27C401AK CPU 2 U41 16-500-42-1xx U43 16-500-42-2xx AT27HC641R-45DC DEMOD

16P0108 (CONTROL)

U21 --- AT28C64 FW/RT ID U41 16-500-90-1xx U42 16-500-90-2xx 05P0386

(CONTROL) U43 16-500-90-3xx

MBM27C1000A-15Z Terminal (For IC-511)

FELCOM 11

IB-581 16-500-91-0xx FD Terminal U39 16-501-12-1xx M27C1001-10F1 CPU 1 U44 16-501-14-1xx HN27C1024HG-85 DEMOD

U26 16-501-18-1xx MBM29F400TA- 12PFTN

CPU 2 (Update from FD)

16P0148 (CPU)

U11 --- M6M80041P (EEPROM) FW/RT ID

FELCOM 12

IB-581 --- 16-501-16-1xx FD Terminal

Appendix

AP4-7


U69 16-500-68-1xx TX CPU *9.6k data:Ver104--

U38 16-500-69-1xx MBM27C1000A-15Z RX CPU

*9.6k data:Ver106--

16P0080 (CPU 1)

U21 16-500-70-1xx TC57H1024AD SYNCCPU

U5 16-500-74-1xx µPD27C4096DZ-12 SYS CPU

*9.6k data:Ver114-- *HSD:Ver116--

16P0081 (CPU 2)

U65 16-500-75-1xx HD647180X0FS8L NAV CPU 16P0081-66

(C) and after

(CPU 2)

16-501-08-1xx M27C4001-10F1 IO CPU (4M)


16P0081 (A)

(CPU 2)

U89

16-500-83-1xx MBM27C1000A-15Z IO CPU (1M)

16P0079 (DEMOD) U34 16-500-77-1xx TC57H1024AD-85 DEMOD

U46 16P0078 (TX/RX IF) U48 16-500-76-1xx MBM27C256A-25 TX IF MOD

U21 16-500-96-1xx U22 16-500-96-2xx U13 16-500-96-3xx

16P0082 (V CODEC)

U14 16-500-96-4xx

M27C256B 4 pcs./set CODEC

(Old type pcb:16S0121)

16P0064 (AZ CPU) U2 16-500-81-1xx TC57256AD-15 AZ CPU 16P0065 (EL CPU) U4 16-500-82-1xx TC57256AD-15 EL CPU

PC --- 16-500-84-0xx FD Terminal

FELCOM 80

16P0084 (MOTHER) U1 --- M6M80041P FW/RT ID

U5 16-501-05-1xx M27C4002-12F1 SYS CPU


U67 16-501-06-1xx M27C4001-10F1 IO CPU


16P0133 (CPU 2)

U37 16-500-75-0xx HD647180X0FS8L NAV CPU 16P0131 (DEMOD) U34 16-501-07-1xx TC57H1024AD-85 DEMOD

U26 16-501-96-1xx U27 16-501-96-2xx U32 16-501-96-3xx

16P0134 (V.CODEC)

U33 16-501-96-4xx

M27C256B 4 pcs./set CODEC

U38 16-501-03-1xx RX CPU U69 16-501-04-1xx M27C1001-10F1 TX CPU 16P0132

(CPU 1) U21 16-500-70-1xx HN27C1024HG-85 SYNC CPU U50 16P0130

(RF CON) U52 16-500-76-1xx M27C256B-10F1 TX IF MOD

16P0135 (MOTHER) U1 M6M80041P --- FW/RT ID

FELCOM 81

IB-581 -- 16-501-09-0xx FD Terminal

Appendix

AP4-8

Model PCB type ROM Version No. ROM type Note AR-

B1378FH (CPU)

F ROM 16-501-33-0xx HSD CPU

U16 16-501-34-1xx DEMOD 16P0160 (DEMOD) U3 16-501-35-1xx M27C10024-12F1 DECODE

IB-680/681

16P0158 (TX/RX IF) U35 16-501-37-1xx M27C256B-10F1 TX IF MODE

Appendix

AP4-9

4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed (DSC-5/6/8 series and DMC-5 and FM-7500) Production of LCD module, LCM-523-68HE-4, used in above mentioned models has been discontinued. We are now using the different type, PC2402LR-AEA-E. (The current LCD is green color, while the previous one is yellow) In addition, the CONTROL board has been modified to be used for the LCD module of current type. Note that no compatibility exists between two LCD modules; The new LCD module cannot be used in combination with the previous CONTROL board, because of different LCD supply voltage. Replace the LCD and the CONTROL board at the same time. If a wrong combination is selected, the display becomes entirely black or white. In DSC-6 and DSC-8 series, replace the PANEL board if the LCD is defective. The LCD module is soldered to the PANEL board in these models.

05P0407 board suffix character Combination of boards and Program version Note 1)

Model None A B C D E F G

A to C and none type board

D to G type board

DSC-5 X X DSC-5R X X DSC-5A X X DSC-5AR X X DSC-5V X X

05-501-39-141 05-501-39-142 and after

DSC-6 X X DSC-6A X X 05-501-68-102 05-501-68-103

and after DSC-8V X X DSC-8VP X X 05-501-67-102 05-501-67-103

and after

DMC-5 X X 05-501-48-141 05-501-48-142 and after

FM-7500 X X 05-501-39-141 05-501-39-142 and after

Type of LCD module

Old type: LMC-523-68HE-4

New type: PC24021LR-AEA-E

05P0407-11, 22, 33 05P0407-33, 66 Note 2) Combination

of Suffix number and program ver.

DSC-5 series, DMC-5 and FM-7500

05P0407-11, 22: Ver 12x

DSC-5 series, DMC-5 and FM-7500

05P0407-33, 66: Ver 14x

Delete of unnecessary parts

X X X X

Appendix

AP4-10

*** D type board: commonly used ****** D type board: commonly used ****** D type board: commonly used ****** D type board: commonly used *** Note 1) Old and new LCDs are controlled by different programs. Program of D to G boards can be used to A to C and none suffix board. Program of A to C and none boards cannot be used to D to G suffix board. Note 2) Select adequate program version level for the board in DSC-5 series, DMC-5, and FM-7500. Software was upgraded as hardware was changed. Note 3)

*CONTROL pcb 05P0407D Code No.00551370000 (DSC-5/5A/5V, FM-7500)

05P0407E Code No.00551511000 (DMC-5) 05P0407F Code No.00560546000 (DSC-8V/8VP)

05P0407G Code No.00594569000 (DSC-6/6A) *PANEL pcb

05P0577 Code No.00560545000 *LCD print

PC2402LR-AEA-E Code No.00593141000

Appendix

AP4-11

4.3 FURUNO Information FQ5-1999-004 1/2

Appendix

AP4-12

2/2

GMDSS_TCE-D

Documents

Transcript of GMDSS_TCE-D